Dell Command Line Reference Guide for the S6010–ON System 9.14.1.5 May 2019 Rev.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2018 - 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide.........................................................................................................40 Objectives........................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Audience..............................................................................................................................................................................
banner motd....................................................................................................................................................................... 83 cam-acl................................................................................................................................................................................ 84 clear average-power............................................................................................................................
telnet-peer-stack-unit.................................................................................................................................................... 145 terminal length..................................................................................................................................................................146 traceroute..................................................................................................................................................
deny tcp....................................................................................................................................................................... 192 deny udp...................................................................................................................................................................... 195 ip access-list extended..................................................................................................................................
set metric.................................................................................................................................................................... 249 set metric-type..........................................................................................................................................................250 set next-hop....................................................................................................................................................
show bfd neighbors.........................................................................................................................................................310 vrrp bfd neighbor............................................................................................................................................................. 314 Chapter 8: Boot Command Line Interface...................................................................................316 boot change......................
bgp redistribute-internal.......................................................................................................................................... 347 bgp regex-eval-optz-disable...................................................................................................................................347 bgp router-id..............................................................................................................................................................
redistribute ospf........................................................................................................................................................ 395 router bgp................................................................................................................................................................... 396 shutdown all....................................................................................................................................................
service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues......................................................................................................................... 450 service-policy rate-limit-protocols..............................................................................................................................450 show cpu-queue rate cp................................................................................................................................................
Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands.....................................................................................................................491 logging coredump stack-unit.................................................................................................................................. 491 Offline Diagnostic Commands......................................................................................................................................492 diag stack-unit..............
clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding.......................................................................................................................... 538 ip dhcp relay............................................................................................................................................................... 539 ip dhcp snooping.......................................................................................................................................................
debug fip snooping rx.....................................................................................................................................................574 feature fip-snooping.......................................................................................................................................................575 fip-snooping enable................................................................................................................................................
ip igmp query-interval............................................................................................................................................... 616 ip igmp query-max-resp-time..................................................................................................................................617 ip igmp ssm-map........................................................................................................................................................
show interfaces......................................................................................................................................................... 669 show interfaces configured.................................................................................................................................... 675 show interfaces dampening....................................................................................................................................
ip icmp source-interface............................................................................................................................................... 730 ipv6 icmp source-interface............................................................................................................................................731 ip max-frag-count.........................................................................................................................................................
ipv6 access-list................................................................................................................................................................ 786 cam-acl-egress................................................................................................................................................................ 787 cam-acl.................................................................................................................................................
max-area-addresses....................................................................................................................................................... 828 max-lsp-lifetime...............................................................................................................................................................829 maximum-paths..................................................................................................................................................
name............................................................................................................................................................................. 874 show config................................................................................................................................................................ 875 show vlan.................................................................................................................................................
ip vlan-flooding.................................................................................................................................................................918 Chapter 31: Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)......................................................... 919 clear ip msdp peer........................................................................................................................................................... 919 clear ip msdp sa-cache...............
name.................................................................................................................................................................................. 950 port-channel path-cost custom................................................................................................................................... 951 protocol spanning-tree mstp.....................................................................................................................................
show ipv6 neighbors................................................................................................................................................ 989 trusted–port...............................................................................................................................................................990 Chapter 36: Object Tracking......................................................................................................992 IPv4 Object Tracking Commands.......
ip ospf cost............................................................................................................................................................... 1034 ip ospf dead-interval...............................................................................................................................................1035 ip ospf hello-interval...............................................................................................................................................
debug ipv6 ospf packet......................................................................................................................................... 1094 debug ipv6 ospf spf................................................................................................................................................ 1095 default-information originate................................................................................................................................
ip pim rp-address......................................................................................................................................................1142 ip pim rp-candidate.................................................................................................................................................. 1143 ip pim sparse-mode..................................................................................................................................................
Chapter 42: Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)................................................................. 1193 description....................................................................................................................................................................... 1193 disable............................................................................................................................................................................... 1194 extend system-id......
set................................................................................................................................................................................1237 show qos class-map................................................................................................................................................ 1237 show qos policy-map.............................................................................................................................................
show config.................................................................................................................................................................... 1285 show ip rip database.....................................................................................................................................................1286 show running-config rip......................................................................................................................................
service obscure-passwords................................................................................................................................... 1331 Authentication and Password Commands...............................................................................................................1332 aaa authentication enable......................................................................................................................................1332 aaa authentication login..........
Port Authentication (802.1X) Commands................................................................................................................ 1371 dot1x authentication (Configuration)..................................................................................................................1372 dot1x authentication (Interface).......................................................................................................................... 1372 dot1x auth-fail-vlan......................
show ip dhcp snooping............................................................................................................................................1412 Role-Based Access Control Commands................................................................................................................... 1413 aaa authorization role-only.....................................................................................................................................1413 role......................
snmp-server contact.............................................................................................................................................. 1450 snmp-server enable traps......................................................................................................................................1450 snmp-server engineID............................................................................................................................................
stack-unit stack-group................................................................................................................................................. 1515 upgrade system stack-unit.......................................................................................................................................... 1515 Chapter 53: Storm Control....................................................................................................... 1517 disable storm-control pfc...........
SupportAssist Activity Commands............................................................................................................................ 1551 action-manifest get................................................................................................................................................. 1551 action-manifest install............................................................................................................................................
tunnel hop-limit..............................................................................................................................................................1586 tunnel keepalive............................................................................................................................................................. 1586 tunnel-mode...............................................................................................................................................
proxy-gateway static....................................................................................................................................................1623 remote-mac-address exclude-vlan........................................................................................................................... 1623 peer-domain-link port-channel exclude-vlan..........................................................................................................
vxlan-vnid........................................................................................................................................................................1660 show running-config vxlan..........................................................................................................................................1660 show vxlan vxlan-instance........................................................................................................................................
show crypto ca-cert..................................................................................................................................................... 1699 show crypto cert...........................................................................................................................................................
1 About this Guide This guide provides information about the Dell EMC Networking operating system (OS) command line interface (CLI). This book also includes information about the protocols and features supported in Dell EMC Networking OS.
Information Icons This guide uses the following information symbols: NOTE: The Note icon signals important operational information. CAUTION: The Caution icon signals information about situations that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. NOTE: The Warning icon signals information about hardware handling that could result in injury.
2 CLI Basics This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) structure and command modes. The Dell EMC Networking operating software commands are in a text-based interface that allows you to use the launch commands, change command modes, and configure interfaces and protocols.
User "admin" on line vty0 ( 123.12.1.123 ) User "admin" on line vty1 ( 123.12.1.123 ) User "Irene" on line vty3 ( 123.12.1.321 ) DellEMC#conf When another user enters CONFIGURATION mode, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a message similar to the following: % Warning: User "admin" on line vty2 "172.16.1.210" is in configuration In this case, the user is “admin” on vty2.
When entering commands, you can take advantage of the following timesaving features: ● Commands are not case-sensitive. ● Enter partial (truncated) command keywords. For example, you can enter int teng 1/1/1 for the interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 command. ● Use the TAB key to complete keywords in commands. ● Use the up Arrow key to display the last enabled command. ● Use either the Backspace key or Delete key to erase the previous character.
Using the no Command To disable, delete or return to default values, use the no form of the commands. For most commands, if you type the keyword no in front of the command, you disable that command or delete it from the running configuration. In this guide, the no form of the command is described in the Syntax portion of the command description.
Enabling Software Features on Devices Using a Command Option The capability to activate software applications or components on a device using a command is supported on this platform. Starting with Release 9.4(0.0), you can enable or disable specific software features or applications that need to run on a device by using a command attribute in the CLI interface. This enables effective, streamlined management and administration of applications and utilities that run on a device.
show feature Verify the status of software applications, such as VRF, that are activated and running on a device. Syntax show feature Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Updated the command to display the IPV6acloptimized feature on the S6100– ON and Z9100–ON. 9.12(1.
To enter CLASS-MAP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the class-map command, and then enter the class map name. The prompt changes to include config-classmap. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. CONFIGURATION Mode In EXEC Privilege mode, use the configure command to enter CONFIGURATION mode and configure routing protocols and access interfaces. To enter CONFIGURATION mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to EXEC Privilege mode. 2.
EIS Mode To enable or configure Egress Interface Selection (EIS), use EIS mode. To enter EIS mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the management egress-interface-selection command. The prompt changes to include conf-mgmt-eis. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. EXEC Mode When you initially log in to the switch, by default, you are logged in to EXEC mode.
NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS, the stack unit number and interfaces start from 0. But in Dell EMC Networking OS Open Networking platforms, the stack unit number and interfaces start from 1. The prompt changes to include the designated interface and slot/port[/subport] number.
1. To enable LLDP globally, verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. To enable LLDP on an interface, verify that you are logged in to INTERFACE mode. 2. Enter the protocol lldp command. The prompt changes to include conf-lldp or conf-if-interface-lldp. LLDP MANAGEMENT INTERFACE Mode To enable and configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) on management interfaces, use LLDP MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode. To enter LLDP MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to LLDP mode. 2.
OPENFLOW INSTANCE Mode To enable and configure OpenFlow instances, use OPENFLOW INSTANCE mode. To enter OPENFLOW INSTANCE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the openflow of-instance command, and then the OpenFlow ID number of the instance you want to create or configure. The prompt changes to include conf-of-instance of-id. You can return to the CONFIGURATION mode by entering the exit command.
2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree rstp command. The prompt changes to include conf-rstp. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. ROUTE-MAP Mode To configure a route map, use ROUTE-MAP mode. To enter ROUTE-MAP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Use the route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] command. The prompt changes to include config-route-map. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command.
To enter ROUTER RIP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the router rip command. The prompt changes to include conf-router_rip. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. SPANNING TREE Mode To enable and configure the Spanning Tree protocol, use SPANNING TREE mode. For more information, see Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). To enter SPANNING TREE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2.
3 File Management This section contains command line interface (CLI) commands needed to manage the configuration files, as well as other file management commands.
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to specify the secondary Dell EMC Networking OS image. system: Enter the keyword system: to use the system image file URL (system). ftp: Enter the keyword FTP: to retrieve the image from an FTP server. ftp:// userid:password@hostip/filepath. nfsmount Enter the keyword nfsmount: to retrieve the image from a mounted NFS file system. nfsmount://filepath system: Enter the keyword system: to retrieve the image from the system.
Parameters flash: Use the keyword flash: to change the current directory to internal flash and its sub directories. usbflash: Use the keyword usbflash: to change the current directory to the inserted USB. directory name and path Enter the directory name and path as follows: directory name ([[flash://]directory_path]) NOTE: The cd command without any arguments will change the current directory to flash: Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
running-config Enter the keywords running-config to copy from the current system configuration. scp: Enter the keyword scp: to copy from the remote file system, IPv4, or IPv6, (scp://userid:password@hostip/filepath). startup-config Enter the keywords startup-config to copy from the startup configuration. tftp: Enter the keyword tftp: to copy from the remote file system, IPv4, or IPv6, (tftp://hostip/filepath). usbflash: Enter the keyword usbflash: to copy the file to or from the external USB flash.
When you load the startup configuration or a configuration file from a network server such as TFTP to the running configuration, the configuration is added to the running configuration. This does not replace the existing running configuration. Commands in the configuration file has precedence over commands in the running configuration. Dell EMC Networking OS supports copying the running-configuration to a TFTP server, an FTP server, or a remote NFS file system.
Related Commands ● cd – changes the working directory. delete Delete a file from the flash. After deletion, files cannot be restored. Syntax delete {flash: | nfsmount: | usbflash:} [no-confirm] Parameters flash: To delete a file or directory on the internal flash, enter flash:// then the filename or directory name ([flash://]filepath). nfsmount: To delete a file or directory on the NFS-mounted file system, enter nfsmount:// then the mount point and the file path (nfsmount://filepath).
Parameters flash: For a directory on the internal Flash, enter flash:// directory name. nfsmount: For a file or directory on an NFS-mounted file system, enter nfsmount:// then the mount point and file path. NOTE: While displaying a file directory on a remote NFS file system, it is mandatory to specify the mount-point that indicates the working directory on the NFS file system. You cannot display details corresponding to the root directory of the remote NFS file system.
nfsmount: 1463410688 bytes total (585719808 bytes free) DellEMC# Related Commands ● cd — changes the working directory. format Erase all existing files and reformat the file system. After the file system is formatted, files cannot be restored. Syntax format {flash: | usbflash:} Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
usbflash: Defaults For a directory on the external USB flash, enter usbflash:// directory name. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. DellEMC# mkdir nfsmount:/nfs-mountpoint/guest DellEMC# ● rmdir — remove a directory. mount nfs Mounts an NFS file system to a device. Syntax mount nfs rhost:path mount-point [username password] Parameters Enter the following location keywords and information: rhost:path Enter the remote hosts’s path directory. mount-point Enter the folder name in the local file system.
Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Enhanced to specify the MD5, SHA1, or SHA256 hash of the OS image that the system uses to validate the image during reboot. 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.
○ hardware forwarding-table mode {scaled-l2-switch | scaled-l3-routes | scaled-l3-hosts} ○ cam-ipv6 extended-prefix {1024 | 2048 | 3072} ○ ip ecmp-group maximum-paths 2-64 ● ACL CAM carving related CLIs: ○ cam-acl cli ○ cam-acl-vlan cli ○ cam-acl-egress cli ○ cam-sharing ● Feature keyword CLIs: ○ feature udf-acl ○ feature aclrange ○ feature ipv6acloptimized ○ feature acloptimized Example DellEMC# upgrade system tftp://10.11.8.12/dv-rainier-13 a: 00:39:32 : Discarded 1 pkts. Expected block num : 51.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. Added support for NFS mount. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series 7.5.
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. DellEMC# show boot system stack-unit 1 Current system image information in the system: ============================================= Type Boot Type A B --------------------------------------------------Stack-unit 1 FLASH BOOT 9-0(2-1) 9-0(2-0)[boot] DellEMC# show bootvar Display the variable settings for the boot parameters.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
show os-version Display the release and software image version information of the image file specified. Syntax Parameters Defaults show os-version [file-url] file-url (OPTIONAL) Enter the following location keywords and information: ● For a file on the internal flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename. ● For a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/ filepath. ● For a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath. ● For a file on the USB port, enter usbflash://filepath.
BOOTSEL IMAGE INFORMATION : --------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum boot selector 3.1.0.2 Control Processor passed FPGA IMAGE INFORMATION : ---------------------------------------Card FPGA Name Version Stack-unit 0 S6000 SYSTEM CPLD 10 Stack-unit 0 S6000 MASTER CPLD 12 Stack-unit 0 S6000 SLAVE CPLD 10 DellEMC# Usage Information NOTE: A filepath that contains a dot ( . ) is not supported.
igmp for the current IGMP configuration interface for the current interface configuration interface port-channel for the current port-channel interface configuration. interface tunnel for all configured tunnels. For a specific tunnel, enter the tunnel ID. The range is from 1 to 16383.
route-map for the current route map configuration sflow for the current sFlow configuration snmp for the current SNMP configuration spanning-tree for the current spanning tree configuration static for the current static route configuration status for the file status information supportassist for the current SupportAssist configuration tacacs+ for the current TACACS+ configuration tftp for the current TFTP configuration trace-group for the current trace-group configuration trace-list for
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added the hardware-monitor option. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Expanded to include the last configuration change, start-up last updated (date and time), and who made the change. 6.5.4.0 Added the status option. Example DellEMC# show running-config Current Configuration ...
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.
Command Fields Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. Lines Beginning With Description Dell EMC Network...
Defaults bootflash-image Enter the keyword bootflash-image to change the bootflash image.. bootselectorimage Enter the keyword bootselector-image to upgrade the BIOS system image. stack-unit-id Enter the stack–unit–id to upgrade only the mentioned stack-unit . all Enter the keywords all to upgrade the member stack-units. booted Enter the keyword booted to upgrade from the current image on the device.
verify Validate the software image on the flash drive after the image has been transferred to the system, but before the image has been installed. Syntax Parameters Defaults verify { md5 | sha256 }[ flash:// ] img-file [hash-value] md5 Enter the md5 keyword to use the MD5 message-digest algorithm. sha256 Enter the sha256 keyword to use the SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm flash:// (Optional). Enter the flash:// keyword. The default is to use the flash drive. You can just enter the image file name.
4 Control and Monitoring This section contains command information to configure and monitor the system, including Telnet, file transfer protocol (FTP), and trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • show processes memory show reset-reason show software ifm show system show tech-support ssh-peer-stack-unit telnet telnet-peer-stack-unit terminal length traceroute undebug all virtual-ip write banner exec Configure a message that is displayed when your enter EXEC mode. Syntax banner exec c line c To delete a banner, use the no banner exec command. Parameters Defaults c Enter the keywords banner exec, then enter a character delineator, represented here by the letter c.
Usage Information Example Version Description E-Series Original Command After entering the banner login command, type one or more spaces and a delineator character. Enter the banner text then the second delineator character. When the user is connected to the router, if a message of the day banner is configured, it displays first. If no message of the day banner is configured, the login banner and prompt appear. After the user has logged in, the banner EXEC (if configured) displays.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced the acknowledgement keyword. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Introduced the keyword keyboard-interactive. 8.1.1.
To delete a Message of the Day banner, enter no banner motd. Parameters Defaults c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your MOTD banner the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). No banner is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number , ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt numb er ipmacacl number ecfmacl number [vmanqos | vman-dualqos number } IPV6Acl : 0 IPV4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 ipv4udfmirracl: 0 vrfv4Acl :0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 Allocate space to each CAM region.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. For the new settings to take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks and these blocks cannot be reallocated. The ipv4acl profile range is from 1 to 8. When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 13.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. do Allows the execution of most EXEC-level commands from all CONFIGURATION levels without returning to the EXEC level.
Usage Information Example The following commands are not supported by the do command: ● enable ● disable ● exit ● config DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# do clear counters Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm] DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# do clear logging Clear logging buffer [confirm] DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# do reload System configuration has been modified.
Version Description E-Series Original command. Usage Information Users entering EXEC Privilege mode or any other configured privilege level can access configuration commands. To protect against unauthorized access, use the enable password command to configure a password for the enable command at a specific privilege level. If no privilege level is specified, the default is privilege level 15.
end Return to EXEC Privilege mode from other command modes (for example, CONFIGURATION or ROUTER OSPF modes). Syntax end Command Modes ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Command History Related Commands 92 CONFIGURATION SPANNING TREE MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE LINE INTERFACE TRACE-LIST VRRP ACCESS-LIST PREFIX-LIST AS-PATH ACL COMMUNITY-LIST ROUTER OSPF ROUTER RIP ROUTER ISIS ROUTER BGP This guide is platform-specific.
exec-timeout Set a time interval that the system waits for input on a line before disconnecting the session. Syntax exec-timeout minutes [seconds] To return to default settings, use the no exec-timeout command. Parameters Defaults minutes Enter the number of minutes of inactivity on the system before disconnecting the current session. The range is from 0 to 35791. The default is 10 minutes for the console line and 30 minutes for the VTY line. seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of seconds.
Command Modes ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Command History Related Commands EXEC Privilege CONFIGURATION LINE, INTERFACE TRACE-LIST PROTOCOL GVRP SPANNING TREE MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE MAC ACCESS LIST ACCESS-LIST AS-PATH ACL COMMUNITY-LIST PREFIX-LIST ROUTER OSPF ROUTER RIP ROUTER ISIS ROUTER BGP This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
NOTE: Use this attribute to specify the VRF that is used by the FTP server to accept client connections. If no VRF is specified, then the default VRF is used. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
ftp-server topdir Specify the top-level directory to be accessed when an incoming FTP connection request is made. Syntax ftp-server topdir directory Parameters Defaults directory Enter the directory path. The internal flash is the default directory. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
password password encryption-type Defaults Enter the keyword password then a string up to 40 characters long as the password. Without specifying an encryption type, the password is unencrypted. (OPTIONAL) After the keyword password, enter one of the following numbers: ● 0 (zero) for an unecrypted (clear text) password ● 7 (seven) for a hidden text password Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command.
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on ExaScale. 8.2.1.0 Increased number of VLANs on ExaScale to 4094 (was 2094). 8.1.1.
Usage Information Use this command to make the TFTP clients VRF aware. The VRF name that you specify is used by the TFTP client to reach the TFTP server. If no VRF is specified, then the default VRF is used. Related Commands ● ftp-server topdir — sets the directory to be used for incoming FTP connections. ● ftp-server username — sets a username and password for incoming FTP connections. ip ftp username Assign a user name for outgoing FTP connection requests.
ip ftp vrf Configures an FTP client with a VRF that is used to connect to the FTP server. Syntax ip ftp [vrf {vrf-name | management}] To undo the FTP client configuration, use the ip ftp [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf-name Enter the vrf-name to specify the VRF that is used by the FTP client. management Enter the keyword management to specify that the VRF used by the FTP client is a management VRF.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9000. You can enable the TELNET server on either a management VRF or a user-defined VRF but not both. If you do not specify a VRF name, then the TELNET server is enabled on the default VRF.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on ExaScale. 8.2.1.0 Increased number of VLANs on ExaScale to 4094 (was 2094). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command telnet — telnet to another device.
line Enable and configure console and virtual terminal lines to the system. This command accesses LINE mode, where you can set the access conditions for the designated line. Syntax line {aux 0 |console 0 | vty number [end-number]} Parameters Defaults aux 0 Enter the keyword aux 0 to configure the auxiliary terminal connection. console 0 Enter the keyword console 0 to configure the console port. The console option is <0-0>.
login concurrent-session Configures the limit of concurrent sessions for each user on console and virtual terminal lines. Syntax login concurrent-session {limit number-of-sessions | clear—line enable} no login concurrent-session {limit number-of-sessions | clear—line enable} Parameters Defaults limit number-of- sessions Sets the number of concurrent sessions that any user can have on console and virtual terminal lines. The range is from 1 to 12 (10 VTY lines, one console, and one AUX line).
Escape character is '^]'. Login: admin Password: Current sessions for user admin: Line Location 2 vty 0 10.14.1.97 3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 Clear existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: When you try to create more than the permitted number of sessions, the following message appears, prompting you to close one of your existing sessions. Close any of your existing sessions to log in to the system. $ telnet 10.11.178.14 Trying 10.11.178.14... Connected to 10.11.178.14. Escape character is '^]'.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820, S5000, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z9500. Only the system and security administrators can configure login activity tracking and view the login activity details of other users. If you enable user login statistics, the system displays the last successful login details of the current user, the details of any failed login attempts by others, and if the current user’s permissions have changed since the last login.
motd-banner Enable a message of the day (MOTD) banner to appear when you log in to the system. Syntax motd-banner To disable the MOTD banner, use the no motd-banner command. Defaults Enabled on all lines. Command Modes LINE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. count Enter the number of echo packets to be sent. The default is 5. ● number: from 1 to 2147483647 ● continuous: transmit echo request continuously datagram size Enter the ICMP datagram size. The range is from 36 to 15360 bytes. The default is 100. timeout Enter the interval to wait for an echo reply before timing out. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
Defaults None. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0)P5 Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.8(0.
Example (IPv4) Symbol Description M Could not fragment. ? Unknown packet type. & Packet lifetime exceeded. DellEMC# ping 172.31.1.255 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 172.31.1.255, timeout is 2 seconds: Reply to request 1 from 172.31.1.208 0 ms Reply to request 1 from 172.31.1.216 0 ms Reply to request 1 from 172.31.1.205 16 ms :: Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.209 0 ms Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.66 0 ms Reply to request 5 from 172.31.1.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Added the optional dell-diag and onie parameters. Introduced the no-confirm option. Usage Information 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 9.1(0.0) Added ‘conditional’ parameter. 8.3.19.
The following example shows how to reload the system into ONIE prompt and enter the install mode directly: DellEMC#reload onie install Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes send Send messages to one or all terminal line users. Syntax Parameters Defaults send [*] | [line ] | [console] | [vty] * Enter the asterisk character * to send a message to all tty lines. line Send a message to a specific line. The range is from 0 to 11.
service timestamps To debug and log messages, add time stamps. This command adds either the uptime or the current time and date with local time zone time difference included or excluded. Syntax service timestamps {debug | log} [datetime [localtime] [msec] [showtimezone] [utc] | uptime] To disable timestamping, use the no service timestamps [debug | log] command.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. If you do not specify parameters and enter service timestamps, it appears as service timestamps debug datetime in the running-configuration. To view the current options set for the service timestamps command, use the show runningconfig command. From 9.14.1.
Example DellEMC#show alarms -- Minor Alarms -Alarm Type Duration ------------------------------------------------------------ Major Alarms -Alarm Type Duration ----------------------------------------------------------PEM 2 in unit 1 down 13 min, 36 sec Fan 1 in PSU 2 of Unit 1 is down or removed 13 min, 34 sec DellEMC# show command-tree Display the entire CLI command tree, and optionally, display the utilization count for each command and its options.
show version command usage:1 ! Global configuration mode: aaa authentication enable command usage:1 WORD option usage: 1 default option usage: 0 enable option usage: 0 line option usage: 0 none option usage: 0 radius option usage: 1 tacacs+ option usage: 0 Dell# show cpu-traffic-stats View the CPU traffic statistics. Syntax Parameters Defaults show cpu-traffic-stats [port number | all | cp ] port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the port number to display traffic statistics on that port only.
Usage Information Version Description 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Traffic statistics are sorted on a per-interface basis; the interface receiving the most traffic is displayed first. All CPU and port information is displayed unless a specific port or CPU is specified. Traffic information is displayed for router ports only; not for management interfaces. The traffic statistics are collected only after the debug cpu-traffic-stats command is executed; not from the system bootup.
Example Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series E-Series Original command.
Usage Information Example (all) Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.8.1.0 The output of the show environment fan command for the S Series is changed to display fan speeds instead of showing the fan status as up or down.
0 39 36 37 37 31 31 46 show inventory Display the switch type, components (including media), and Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS), including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols. Syntax Parameters Defaults show inventory [media slot] media slot (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword media then the stack ID of the stack member for which you want to display pluggable media inventory.
show login statistics Displays login statistics of users who have used the console or virtual terminal lines to log in to the system. Syntax show login statistics [all | [[successful-attempts | unsuccessful-attempts] [user login-id] [time-period days]] | user login-id] Parameters Defaults all (Optional)Displays the login statistics of all users in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period.
Example The following is sample output of the show login statistics command. DellEMC#show login statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts command. DellEMC#show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 30 day(s). The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts time-period days command. DellEMC# show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts time-period 15 There were 0 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 15 day(s).
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced this version of the command for the S-Series. The output for show memory displays the memory usage of LP part (sysdlp) of the system. The sysdlp is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the S-Series’ CPU.
Example Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Added the keywords management-unit [details]. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
CoreID: 3 Process: sysdlp PID: 428 CoreID: 0 Process: sysd PID: 410 CoreID: 2 TID Runtime(ms) Thread 56 20 usm 55 10 DHCLIENT 54 0 cms 53 60 portmirr 52 0 cfgDataSync 51 0 sysCompMgr 50 50 statMgr 49 1010 sflCp 48 30 snmp 47 0 dpi_cmow 46 0 dpi_taskcmo CPU usage: 5sec - 3.78% 1min - 2.56% 5min - 3.40% CPU usage: 5sec - 1.59% 1min - 0.96% 5min - 2.50% Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min 2 10000 1 10000 0 TTY 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 6 10000 0.
● show hardware stack-unit — displays the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member. ● show hardware system-flow — displays Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. ● show interfaces stack-unit — displays information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series stack member. ● show processes memory (S-Series) — displays CPU usage information based on processes running in an S-Series.
Field Description Cur Len Current number of messages enqueued High Mark Highest number of packets in the queue at any time #of to / Timeout Timeout count #of Retr /Retries Number of retransmissions #msg Sent/Msg Sent/ Number of messages sent #msg Ackd/Ack Rcvd Number of messages acknowledged Retr /Available Retra Number of retries left Total/ Max Retra Number of retries allowed Important Points: ● The SWP provides flow control-based reliable communication between the sending and receiving so
show processes memory Display memory usage information based on processes running in the S-Series or Z-Series system. Syntax show processes memory {management-unit | stack unit {unit-id | all | summary}} Parameters management-unit Enter the keyword management-unit for CPU memory usage of the stack management unit. stack unit unit id Enter the keyword stack unit then a stack unit ID of the member unit for which to display memory usage on the forwarding processor.
show processes memory output Field Description ResSize Actual resident size of the process in memory Size Process test, stack, and data size Allocs Total dynamic memory allocated Frees Total dynamic memory freed Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated Current Current dynamic memory in use The output for the show process memory command displays the memory usage statistics running on CP part (sysd) of the system. The sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on S-Series’ CP.
270 bcmDISC 117927936 0 0 269 bcmATP-RX 117927936 0 0 268 bcmATP-TX 117927936 0 0 267 bcmSTACK 117927936 0 0 266 bcmRX 117927936 0 0 265 bcmLINK.0 117927936 0 0 !----------- output truncated --------------! DellEMC# 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 show reset-reason Display the reason for the last system reboot.
Example — System reboot due to watchdog timeout Example — System reboot due to thermal shutdown DellEMC#show reset-reason Cause: Watchdog timeout. Reset Time: N/A The example shows that the last system reboot was due to thermal shutdown. DellEMC#show reset-reason Cause: Thermal Shutdown. Reset Time: N/A. Example — The example shows the reason for the last reboot was due to BIOS boot fail. System reboot due to BIOS boot DellEMC#show reset-reason fail Cause: Reset on Boot Ok Fail. Reset Time: N/A.
stack-unit unit- ID trace-flags Defaults Enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack member number to display IFM information for that unit. Enter the keyword trace-flags to display IFM information for internal trace flags. None. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Parameters brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view an abbreviated list of system information. stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack member ID for information on t stack member. stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by stack member ID for the informatio disabled-ports on that stack number and followed by the disabled-ports for the information on the ports that disabled.
-- Unit 1 -Unit Type : Management Unit Status : online Next Boot : online Required Type : S6010-ON - 32-port TE/FG (S6010) Current Type : S6010-ON - 32-port TE/FG (S6010) Master priority : 0 Hardware Rev : 2.0 Num Ports : 128 Up Time : 14 hr, 58 min Dell EMC Networking OS Version : 9-13(0-0) Jumbo Capable : yes POE Capable : no FIPS Mode : disabled Boot Flash : 3.26.2.10 Boot Selector : 3.26.0.
flash: Save to local flash drive (flash://filename. A maximum of 20 characters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Updated to display the show revision and show os-version command outputs. 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
● ● ● ● Example (options under show techsupport) show show show show Inventory log summary command-history (last 20 commands) log DellEMC# show tech-support ? page Page through output stack-unit Unit Number | Pipe through a command DellEMC#show tech-support stack-unit 1 ? | Pipe through a command DellEMC# show tech-support stack-unit 1 | ? except Show only text that does not match a pattern find Search for the first occurrence of a pattern grep Show only text that matches a pattern no-more Don'
--------------------------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum runtime 9.14(0.0) Control Processor passed BOOT IMAGE INFORMATION : --------------------------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum boot flash 3.26.2.10 Control Processor passed BOOTSEL IMAGE INFORMATION : --------------------------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum boot selector 3.26.0.
Type runtime Version 9.14(0.0) Target Control Processor checksum passed BOOT IMAGE INFORMATION : --------------------------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum boot flash 3.20.2.5 Control Processor passed BOOTSEL IMAGE INFORMATION : --------------------------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum boot selector 3.20.0.
! boot system stack-unit 1 primary system://A boot system stack-unit 1 default system://A
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S-Series. telnet Connect through Telnet to a server. The Telnet client and server in Dell EMC Networking support IPv4 and IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router or a connection can be initiated from the router. NOTE: The Telnet server and client are VRF-aware. Using the vrf parameter in this command, you can make a Telnet server or client to listen to a specific VRF.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Added support for source-interface for link-local IPv6 addressing. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv6). Increased the number of VLANs to 4094 (was 2094). 8.1.1.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S-Series. terminal length Configure the number of lines displayed on the terminal screen.
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. traceroute View a packet’s path to a specific device. Syntax Parameters traceroute {host | vrf instance | ip-address | ipv6-address} host Enter the name of device. vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf then the VRF Instance name. ip-address Enter the IP address of the device in dotted decimal format.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Added support for the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6 address on the E-Series. E-Series Original command.
undebug all Disable all debug operations on the system. Syntax undebug all Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. Until the authentication, only extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports remote authentication dial-in service (RADIUS) and active directory environments using 802.
debug dot1x Display 802.1X debugging information. Syntax Parameters debug dot1x [all | auth-pae-fsm | backend-fsm | eapol-pdu] [interface interface] all Enable all debugs in dot1x. auth-pae-fsm Enable Authentication PAE FSM debugs in dot1x. backend-fsm Enable Backend Auth FSM debugs in dot1x. eapol-pdu Enable EAPOL frame trace in dot1x. interface Restricts the debugging information to an interface.
max-attempts number Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords max-attempts followed number of attempts desired before authentication fails. The range is from 1 to 5. The default is 3. 3 attempts Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.
Usage Information Version Description 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. The prerequisites for enabling MAB-only authentication on a port are: ● Enable 802.1X authentication globally on the switch and on the port (the dot1x authentication command). ● Enable MAC authentication bypass on the port (the dot1x mac-auth-bypass command). In MAB-only authentication mode, a port authenticates using the host MAC address even though 802.1xauthentication is enabled.
dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface. Enable dot1x both globally and at the interface level. Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x max-supplicants Restrict the number of supplicants that can be authenticated and permitted to access the network through the port. This configuration is only takes effect in Multi-auth mode.
Parameters Defaults force-authorized Enter the keywords force-authorized to forcibly authorize a port. auto Enter the keyword auto to authorize a port based on the 802.1X operation result. forceunauthorized Enter the keywords force-unauthorized to forcibly de-authorize a port. None Command Modes Auto Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x reauth-max Configure the maximum number of times a port can re-authenticate before the port becomes unauthorized. Syntax dot1x reauth-max number To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command.
To return to the default, use the no dot1x server-timeout command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds. The range is from 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant. The default is 30. 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds. The range is from 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant. The default is 30. 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Enter a supplicant’s MAC address using the mac-address option to display CoS mapping information only for the specified supplicant. You can display the CoS mapping information applied to traffic from authenticated supplicants on 802.
Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
Example (macaddress) DellEMC# show dot1x interface tengigabitethernet 1/32/1 mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:10 Supplicant Mac: 0 0 0 0 0 10 Lookup for Mac: 802.
6 Access Control Lists (ACL) Access control lists (ACLs) are supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS.
• • • • • • • • permit tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) permit icmp (for IPv6 ACLs) permit (for IPv6 ACLs) deny udp (for IPv6 ACLs) deny arp (for Extended MAC ACLs) deny tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) deny icmp (for Extended IPv6 ACLs) deny (for IPv6 ACLs) Commands Common to all ACL Types The following commands are available within each ACL mode and do not have mode-specific options.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The remark command is available in each ACL mode. You can configure up to 4294967291 remarks for a given IP ACL and 65536 remarks for a given MAC ACL. You can include a remark with or without a remark number.
show config Display the current ACL configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ● ● ● ● Command History Example CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
access-class Apply a standard ACL to a terminal line. Syntax access-class access-list-name [ipv4 | ipv6] To remove an ACL, use the no access-class command. Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the name of a configured Standard ACL, up to 140 characters. ipv4 Enter the keyword ipv4 to configure an IPv4 access class. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to configure an IPv6 access class. Not configured. Command Modes LINE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
already configured on this terminal line. Before applying either IPv4 or IPv6 filtering, first undo the generic configuration using the no access-class access-list-name command. Similarly, if you have configured either IPv4 or IPv6 specific filtering on a terminal line, you cannot apply generic IP ACLs on top of this configuration. Before applying the generic ACL configuration, first undo the existing configuration using the no access-class access-list-name [ipv4 | ipv6] command.
Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters. in Enter the keyword in to apply the ACL to incoming traffic. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic. implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action of the ACL from implicit-deny to implicit-permit (that is, if the traffic does not match the filters in the ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped).
NOTE: This command supports Loopback interfaces EE3 and EF series route processor modules (RPMs). This command does not support Loopback interfaces ED series RPMs and S-Series Loopback interfaces. NOTE: If you apply outbound(egress) IP acl on a switch port, the filter applies only for routed traffic egressing out of that port. To associate an access-list to a non-default VRF, use the vrf attribute of this command.
ip control-plane egress-filter Enable egress Layer 3 ACL lookup for IPv4 CPU traffic. Syntax ip control-plane egress-filter Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
Command History Usage Information Example 180 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Updated the show command output to include monitor option. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.
Standard IP ACL Commands When you create an ACL without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit. The platform supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs. NOTE: Also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands sections. deny To drop packets with a certain IP address, configure a filter.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Defaults host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address or hostname. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count the packets. bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count the bytes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enter ACL matches in the log. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match the IP DSCP values. The range is from 0 to 63. ecn (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ecn to match the ECN bits. The range is from 0 to 3.
Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for the non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the “Quality of Service” section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you have exhausted all the sequence numbers, this feature permits re-assigning a new sequence number to entries of an existing access-list.
no-drop Defaults Enter the keywords no-drop to match only the forwarded packets. Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.
Extended IP ACL Commands When an ACL is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit. The following commands configure extended IP ACLs, which in addition to the IP address, also examine the packet’s protocol type. The platform supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs. NOTE: Also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands sections. deny Configure a filter that drops IP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Defaults order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to describe the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
When you use the log option, the CP processor logs detail the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, see Port Monitoring. The C-Series and S-Series cannot count both packets and bytes, when you enter the count byte options, only bytes are incremented.
parameter-problem count time-exceeded count port-unreachable count The ICMP packets cannot be filtered using mirroring ACL. Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the keyword dscp. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.
● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(2.0P0) Added the established parameter on the on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100– ON, Z9100–ON. 9.11(0.
Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
Defaults dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq = equal to ● neq = not equal to ● gt = greater than ● lt = less than ● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the keyword dscp. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. Deprecated the keyword established. 6.5.1.
ip access-list extended Name (or select) an extended IP access list (IP ACL) based on IP addresses or protocols. Syntax ip access-list extended access-list-name To delete an access list, use the no ip access-list extended access-list-name command. Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the access list name. All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.
permit To pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax permit {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [ttl operator] [count [bytes]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [monitor] [no-drop] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command.
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.
● Use the no permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. Parameters source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
● 169 = SNMP Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. Deprecated the keyword established. 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the “Quality of Service” section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
● Use the no permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address command. Parameters Defaults source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.
7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64 8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1 Total Ports: 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM. DellEMC# Data Mask 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 From To #Covered 1023 1024 Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands ● ip access-list extended — create an extended ACL. ● permit — assign a permit filter for IP packets. ● permit tcp — assign a permit filter for TCP packets.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When all sequence numbers are exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning a new sequence number to entries of an existing access-list.
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: ● 23 = Telnet ● 20 and 21 = FTP-DATA and FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP portname (OPTIONAL) Enter the logical name of the protocol.
sunrpc syslog tacacs talk tftp time who xdmcp Defaults Sun Remote Procedure Call (111) System Logger (514) TAC Access Control System (49) Talk (517) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (69) Time (37) Who service (rwho, 513) X Display Manager Control Protocol (177) destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit or deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
Common MAC Access List Commands The following commands are available within both MAC ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do not have mode-specific options. These commands allow you to clear, display, and assign MAC ACL configurations. The platform supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs. The MAC ACL can be applied on Physical, Port-channel and VLAN interfaces. As per the specified rules in the ACL, the traffic on the interface/ VLAN members or Port-channel members will be permitted or denied.
Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC access list, up to 140 characters. NOTE: This option is available only with the keyword in option. vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan and then enter a range of VLANs. The range is from 1 to 4094 (you can use IDs 1 to 4094). NOTE: This option is available only with the keyword in option. optimized Enter the keyword optimized to enable ACL optimization. in Enter the keyword in to configure the ACL to filter incoming traffic.
Usage Information You can assign one ingress ACL and one egress ACL (standard or extended) to an interface. Related Commands ● mac access-list standard — configure a standard MAC ACL. ● mac access-list extended — configure an extended MAC ACL. show mac access-lists Display all of the Layer 2 ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface, and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed.
show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured). Syntax show mac accounting access-list access-list-name interface interface in | out Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
Example DellEMC# show mac accounting access-list TestMac interface tengigabitethernet 1/8/1 in Ingress Standard mac access-list TestMac on TenGigabitEthernet 1/89/1 Total cam count 2 seq 5 permit aa:aa:aa:aa:00:00 00:00:00:00:ff:ff count (0 packets) seq 10 deny any count (20072594 packets) DellEMC# Standard MAC ACL Commands When you create an access control list without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added the monitor option.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
Parameters Defaults any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
NOTE: When you configure the ACL logging and byte counters simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead. Related Commands ● deny — configure a filter to drop packets. ● permit — configure a filter to forward packets. Extended MAC ACL Commands When an access-list is created without any rule and then applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects implicit permit. The following commands configure Extended MAC ACLs.
Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to include ACL messages in the log. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated.
mac access-list extended Name a new or existing extended MAC access control list (extended MAC ACL). Syntax mac access-list extended access-list-name [cpu-qos] To delete a MAC access list, use the no mac access-list extended access-list-name command. Parameters access-list-name Enter a text string as the MAC access list name, up to 140 characters. cpu-qos Defaults Enter the keywords cpu-qos to assign this ACL to control plane traffic only (CoPP).
DellEMC(config-ext-macl)# exit DellEMC(conf)# do show mac accounting access-list snickers interface tengig 1/17 in Extended mac access-list snickers on TenGigabitEthernet 1/17 seq 10 permit any any ev2 eq 800 count bytes (559851886 packets 191402152148 bytes) seq 20 permit any any ev2 eq 806 count bytes (74481486 packets 5031686754 bytes) seq 30 permit any any ev2 eq 86dd count bytes (7751519 packets 797843521 bytes) DellEMC(conf)# mac-access-list access-list extended TestMATExt DellEMC(config-ext-macl)# re
mac-destination- Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched. address-mask The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. Defaults ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the following Ethertypes: ● ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format ● llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format ● snap - is the IEEE 802.
NOTE: When you configure the ACL logging and byte counters simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead. Related Commands ● deny — configure a MAC ACL filter to drop packets. ● seq — configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number. IP Prefix List Commands When you create an access-list without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit.
deny To drop packets meeting the criteria specified, configure a filter. Syntax deny ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] To delete a drop filter, use the no deny ip-prefix command. Parameters ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/ 8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0. ge min-prefix- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge and then enter the minimum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
Parameters prefix-name Enter a string up to 16 characters long as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters long. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
any (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword any to match any packets. ip-prefix /nn (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0. ge min-prefix- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge and then enter the minimum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32. length le max-prefix- length bitmask number Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le and then enter the maximum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The continue feature allows movement from one route-map entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number). If you do not specify the sequence number, the continue feature simply moves to the next sequence number (also known as an implied continue). If a match clause exists, the continue feature executes only after a successful match occurs.
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced. ● route-map — enable a route map. match as-path To match routes that have a certain AS number in their BGP path, configure a filter.
Related Commands Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● set as-path — add information to the BGP AS_PATH attribute. match community To match routes that have a certain COMMUNITY attribute in their BGP path, configure a filter. Syntax match community community-list-name [exact] To delete a community match filter, use the no match community command. Parameters Defaults community-listname Enter the name of a configured community list.
match interface To match routes whose next hop is on the interface specified, configure a filter. Syntax match interface interface To remove a match, use the no match interface interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
match ip address To match routes based on IP addresses specified in an access list, configure a filter. Syntax match ip address prefix-list-name To delete a match, use the no match ip address prefix-list-name command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters Defaults prefix-list prefix- Enter the keywords prefix-list and then enter the name of configured prefix list-name list, up 10 140 characters. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● ● ● match match match match match match interface — redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● ● ● match match match match match match interface — redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface. ip address — redistribute routes that match an IP address. ip next-hop — redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You can prepend up to eight AS numbers to a BGP route. This command influences best path selection in BGP by inserting a tag or AS number into the AS_PATH attribute.
Related Commands ● ● ● ● set set set set level — specify the OSPF area for route redistribution. metric — specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes. metric-type — specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes. tag — specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes. set comm-list delete To remove the specified community list from the BGP route’s COMMUNITY attribute, configure a filter.
Related Commands ● match community — redistribute routes that match the COMMUNITY attribute. ● set community — specify a COMMUNITY attribute. set community Allows you to assign a BGP COMMUNITY attribute. Syntax set community {community-number | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} [additive] To delete a BGP COMMUNITY attribute assignment, use the no set community {communitynumber | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} command.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● match community — redistribute routes that match the COMMUNITY attribute. ● show ip bgp community — display BGP community groups. set level To specify the IS-IS level or OSPF area to which matched routes are redistributed, configure a filter.
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● set set set set automatic-tag — compute the tag value of the route. metric — specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes. metric-type — specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes. tag — specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes.
Usage Information The set local-preference command changes the LOCAL_PREF attribute for routes meeting the route map criteria. To change the LOCAL_PREF for all routes, use the bgp default localpreference command. Related Commands ● bgp default local-preference — change the default LOCAL_PREF attribute for all routes. set metric To assign a new metric to redistributed routes, configure a filter. Syntax set metric [+ | -] metric-value To delete a setting, enter no set metric.
set metric-type To assign a new route type for routes redistributed to OSPF, configure a filter. Syntax set metric-type {internal | external | type-1 | type-2} To delete a setting, use the no set metric-type command. Parameters Defaults internal Enter the keyword internal to assign the Interior Gateway Protocol metric of the next hop as the route’s BGP MULTI_EXIT_DES (MED) value. external Enter the keyword external to assign the IS-IS external metric.
To delete the setting, use the no set next-hop ip-address command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● set set set set automatic-tag — compute the tag value of the route.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. If you do not use the set weight command, router-originated paths have a weight attribute of 32768 and all other paths have a weight attribute of zero.
seq 25 permit 192.0.0.0 bitmask 192.0.0.0 DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)# show route-map Display the current route map configurations. Syntax Parameters show route-map [map-name] map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured route map, up to 140 characters. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
deny (for Standard IP ACLs) To drop packets with a certain IP address, configure a filter. Syntax deny {source | any | host {ip-address}}[count [byte]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command.
that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
deny tcp (for Extended IP ACLs) Configure a filter that drops transmission control protocol (TCP) packets meeting the filter criteria.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added the support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
which the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
deny (for Extended MAC ACLs) To drop packets that match the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-addressmask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destinationaddress-mask} [ethertype-operator] [count [byte]][log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
Parameters Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value. ● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.
Parameters Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value. ● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, standard and extended IPv6 ACLs, and standard and extended MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value. ● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value. ● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
Usage Information Version Description 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000, and MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3.0.0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, Z9000, and MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.
● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
Related Commands ● deny — configure a filter to drop packets. ● permit — configure a filter to forward packets. seq (for IPv6 ACLs) Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit the filter in an IPv6 access list while creating the filter.
The following logical names are supported in TCP: bgp chargen cmd daytime discard domain drip (3949) echo exec finger ftp ftp-data gopher hostname ident irc klogin kshell login lpd nntp pim-rp-disc pop2 pop3 smtp sunrpc tacacs talk telnet time uucp whois www Border Gateway Protocol (179) Character generator (19) Remote commands (rcmd, 514) Daytime (13) Discard (9) Domain Name Service (53) Dynamic Routing Information Protocol Echo (7) Exec (512) Finger (79) File Transfer Protocol (21) FTP data connections (
Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count the packets. bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count the bytes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
Related Commands ● permit – configure a filter to forward packets. permit udp (for IPv6 ACLs) Configure a filter to pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3.0.0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms.
● ● ● ● ● ● fin: finish (no more data from the user) psh: push function rst: reset the connection syn: synchronize sequence numbers urg: urgent field established: datagram of established TCP session Use the established flag to match only ACK and RST flags of established TCP session. You cannot use established along with the other control flags While using the established flag in an ACL rule, all the other TCP control flags are masked, to avoid redundant TCP control flags configuration in a single rule.
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is 5 minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
permit icmp (for IPv6 ACLs) To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} [type] [message-type] [ttl operator] [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering theflow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
deny arp (for Extended MAC ACLs) Configure an egress filter that drops ARP packets on egress ACL supported line cards. (For more information, refer to your line card documentation). Syntax deny arp {destination-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} vlan vlan-id {ipaddress | any | opcode code-number} [count [byte]] [order] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: ● 23 = Telnet ● 20 and 21 = FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value.
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
echo-reply count host-unreachable count host-unknown count network-unknown count net-unreachable count packet-too-big count parameter-problem count port-unreachable count source-quench count time-exceeded count For IPv6: echo count echo-reply count nd-ns count nd-na count packet-too-big count parameter-problem count time-exceeded count port-unreachable count The ICMP packets cannot be filtered using mirroring ACL. Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to deny a packet based on the time to live value.
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.11(2.0P0) Added the type parameter to filter the ICMP packets based on the type and code on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The time interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. no-drop Enter the keywords no-drop to match only the forwarded packets.
7 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path failure detection.
ROUTER OSPFv3 ROUTER BGP ROUTER ISIS Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced support for enabling BFD on non-default VRFs for IPv4 BGP, default, and non-default VRFs for IPv6 BGP on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, C9010, Z9500, and Z9100–ON. 9.11(2.
You can only enable BFD for VRRP in INTERFACE command mode (vrrp bfd all-neighbors). You can enable BFD on both default and nondefault VRFs for OSPF and BGP protocols for both IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors. NOTE: The bfd all-neighbors command is applicable for both IPv4 and IPv6 BGP sessions. bfd enable (Configuration) Enable BFD on all interfaces. Syntax bfd enable Disable BFD using the no bfd enable command. Defaults BFD is disabled by default.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. bfd interval Specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval.
Example Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/3/1)# bfd interval 250 min_rx 300 multiplier 4 role passive DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/3/1)# bfd protocol-liveness Enable the BFD protocol liveness feature.
To disable BFD for all neighbors configured through static routes, use the no ip route bfd [vrf vrf-name] [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] command. Parameters prefix-list prefix- (Optional) Enter the keyword prefix-list followed by the name of the prefix list-name list to enable or disable BFD on specific neighbors.
ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors on a single interface or use non-default BFD session parameters. Syntax ip ospf bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]] To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPF interface implicitly, use the no ip ospf bfd allneighbors disable command in interface mode.. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface.
ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface or use non-default BFD session parameters. Syntax ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]] To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPFv3 interface implicitly, use the no ipv6 ospf bfd allneighbors disable command in interface mode.. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface.
ipv6 route bfd Enable BFD for all IPv6 neighbors configured through static routes. Syntax ipv6 route bfd [vrf vrf-name] [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] To disable BFD for all IPv6 neighbors configured through static routes, use the no ipv6 route bfd [vrf vrf-name] [prefix-list prefix-list-name] [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}] command.
To remove all BFD sessions with IS-IS neighbors discovered on this interface, use the no isis bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]] command. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface. interval (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords interval to specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200.
Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the BGP neighbor that you want to explicitly disable for BFD sessions in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group that you want to explicitly disable for BFD sessions. Defaults None Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
VT - Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 10.1.3.2 RemoteAddr 10.1.3.1 Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Te 1/3/1 Up 300 250 3 C show bfd neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 5.1.1.1 * 6.1.1.1 * 7.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 5.1.1.2 6.1.1.2 7.1.1.
Role: Active Delete session on Down: False Client Registered: CLI Uptime: 00:02:04 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 376 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 314 Number of state changes: 2 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 6 DellEMC# The following example shows the show bfd vrf neighbors detail command output showing the nondefault VRF called “VRF_blue”.
Local Addr: 7.1.1.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:a0:c9:00:00:02 Remote Addr: 7.1.1.
Related Commands ● show bfd neighbors — display the BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface.
8 Boot Command Line Interface To access this BOOT_USER mode, first boot your Dell EMC Networking platform. When you see the “Press ESC to stop auto-boot”, press the ESC key to log into BCLI You enter BOOT_USER mode immediately, as indicated by the BOOT_USER# prompt. NOTE: All commands in this chapter are in Boot_User mode. These commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking platform. You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode.
Command History Usage Information Version Descriptiion 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. After entering the boot change command and selecting the parameters, press Enter. The software prompts you to enter the following: ● The boot device (flash, ftp, tftp, or usbflash), image file name, IP address of the server containing the image, username, and password (only for ftp).
Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. BOOT_USER #boot message boot messages off BOOT_USER # boot show net config retries Show the number of retries for network boot configuration failure. Syntax boot show net config retries Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.
boot zero Erase the configured primary, secondary, or default boot image parameters. If you erase all three parameters, the S6000 switch boots from its internal Flash. Syntax Parameters Defaults boot zero {primary | secondary | default} primary Enter the keyword primary to remove the primary boot parameter. secondary Enter the keyword secondary to remove the secondary boot parameter. default Enter the keyword default to remove the default boot parameter.
Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the gateway router in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Usage Information Use the show default-gateway command to view the current default gateway. Related Commands show_default-gateway— Change the primary, secondary, or default boot image configuration.
Usage Information When you enter the reload command and the system reboots, you will not be prompted for a password to enter the EXEC Privilege mode (normally you are required to enter the enable command). If your console or Telnet session expires after you used the ignore enable-password command, you are prompted for an enable password when you re-establish the session Related Commands reload — Exit from this mode and reload FTOS.
NVRAM erase Erase all NVRAM contents alone. Syntax nvram erase Parameters mac-address Enter a MAC address in standard format. Command Modes BOOT_ADMIN Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Use this command to assign a MAC address if FTOS cannot find a default MAC address. BOOT_USER # BOOT_ADMIN # nvram erase Are you sure (y/n)? : yes Erasing NVRAM sectors....
Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Serial Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. BOOT_USER # serial console 0 9600 BOOT_USER # BOOT_USER # show bootvar Display boot configuration information. Syntax show bootvar Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000.
show default-gateway Display the IP address configured for the default gateway. Syntax show default-gateway Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. BOOT_USER # show default-gateway Gateway IP address: 10.16.100.254 BOOT_USER # Related Commands default-gateway— Configure the IP address for the default gateway.
show serial console baud rate Use the show serial console to show the values of the serial console baud rate. Syntax show serial console baudrate Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. BOOT_USER # show serial console baudrate Serial console baudrate = 9600 watchdog Enable the watchdog timer, when the enabled watchdog timer is set to 60 seconds.
WATCHDOG TIMEOUT: 60 326 Boot Command Line Interface
9 Border Gateway Protocol BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically sent messages to update those routing tables.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for IPv6 VRF. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.5.1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Command Modes ● ROUTER BGP ● ROUTER BGP-address-family Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Introduced command. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Any update without a MED attribute is the least preferred route. If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp asnotation Allows you to implement a method for AS number representation in the command line interface (CLI).
DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# ex DellEMC(conf)#do show run | grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp asnotation asplain DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# ex DellEMC(conf)#do show run |grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf)# Related Commands ● bgp four-octet-as-support — enable 4-byte support for the BGP process.
bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax Include prefixes received from different AS paths during multipath calculation. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax To return to the default BGP routing process, use the no bgp bestpath as-path multipathrelax command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers.
bgp bestpath router-id ignore Do not compare router-id information for external paths during best path selection. Syntax bgp bestpath router-id ignore To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath router-id ignore command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflector’s router ID. For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors. Assign a cluster ID with the bgp cluster-id command. Without a cluster ID, the route reflector cannot recognize route updates from the other route reflectors within the cluster.
The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. The next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved throughout the confederation. Dell EMC Networking OS accepts confederation EBGP peers without a LOCAL_PREF attribute. The software sends AS_CONFED_SET and accepts AS_CONFED_SET and AS_CONF_SEQ.
Usage Information All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. After specifying autonomous systems numbers for the BGP confederation, recycle the peers to update their configuration. Related Commands ● bgp confederation identifier — configure a confederation ID.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. If you enter the bgp dampening command, the default values for half-life, reuse, suppress, and max-suppress-time are applied.
Usage Information All routers apply the bgp default local-preference command setting within the AS. To set the local preference for a specific route, use the set local-preference command in ROUTE-MAP mode. Related Commands ● set local-preference — assign a local preference value for a specific route. bgp dmzlink-bw Enables BGP Link Bandwidth. Syntax bgp dmzlink-bw To disable BGP Link Bandwidth, enter the no bgp dmzlink-bw command.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The bgp fast-external-fallover command appears in the show config command output.
Where the 2-byte format is from 1 to 65535, the 4-byte format is from 1 to 4294967295. Both formats are accepted and the advertisements reflect the entered format. For more information about using the 2 byte or 4-byte format, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. This command automatically restarts the BGP instance for the configuration to take effect.
This command automatically restarts the BGP instance for the configuration to take effect. bgp non-deterministic-med Compare MEDs of paths from different autonomous systems. Syntax bgp non-deterministic-med To return to the default, use the no bgp non-deterministic-med command. Defaults Disabled (that is, paths/routes for the same destination but from different ASs do not have their MEDs compared). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500.
Usage Information This command is a knob to disable BGP next-hop resolution using BGP learned routes. During the nexthop resolution, only the first route that the next-hop resolves through is verified for the route’s protocol source and is checked if the route is learned from BGP or not. The clear ip bgp command is required for this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database consistent. Execute the clear ip bgp command right after executing this command.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
bgp router-id Assign a user-given ID to a BGP router. Syntax bgp router-id ip-address To delete a user-assigned IP address, use the no bgp router-id command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor. The router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface or, if no Loopback interfaces are configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router.
NOTE: Use this attribute to clear a BGP instance corresponding to either a specific address family in a default VRF or an IPv4 address family in a a non-default VRF. * Enter an asterisk ( * ) to reset all BGP sessions. <1-4294967295> Enter <1-4294967295> to clear peers with the AS number. <0.1-65535.6553 Enter <0.1-65535.65535> to clear peers with the AS number in dot format. 5> A.B.C.D Enter the BGP neighbor address in the A.B.C.D format to clear.
Related Commands Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the as-number option. ● bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop — disable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by the BGP. clear ip bgp dampening Clear information on route dampening and return the suppressed route to the Active state.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. After you enter this command, the software deletes the history routes and returns the suppressed routes to the Active state. The clear ip bgp dampening command does not clear the history paths.
● ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. ● $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to reset ipv4 multicast routes. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword unicast to reset ipv4 unicast routes. ipv6 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the keyword unicast to reset ipv6 unicast routes. soft (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword soft to reset soft configuration. in Enter the keyword in to re-configure soft inbound updates.
X:X:X:X::X (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv6 address. peer-group peer- Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group to debug. group-name in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes. A.B.C.D Enter the IP address of peer in the A.B.C.D format. X:X:X:X::X Enter the IPv6 IP address of peer in the X:X:X:X::X format.
Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP. Related Commands ● ● ● ● ● debug ip bgp events — view information about BGP events. debug ip bgp keepalives — view information about BGP keepalives. debug ip bgp notifications — view information about BGP notifications. debug ip bgp updates — view information about BGP updates. show debugging — view enabled debugging operations. debug ip bgp dampening View information on routes being dampened.
debug ip bgp events Display information on local BGP state changes and other BGP events. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] events [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-group-name] events [in | out] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display BGP state changes corresponding to that VRF. A.B.C.
debug ip bgp keepalives Display information about BGP keepalive messages. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] keepalives [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalives [in | out] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display BGP keepalive information corresponding to that VRF. A.B.C.
debug ip bgp notifications Allows you to view information about BGP notifications received from neighbors. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] notifications [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] command.
To disable, use the debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peergroup-name] soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable soft-reconfiguration debugging on that VRF. A.B.C.D (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv4 address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. X:X:X:X::X (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv6 address. peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group.
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view BGP updates information corresponding to that VRF. A.B.C.D (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv4 address of the neighbor. X:X:X:X::X (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv6 address. peer-group peer- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group followed by the name of the peer group-name group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received from neighbors.
To return to the default setting, use the no default-metric command. Parameters Defaults number Enter a number as the metric to be assigned to routes from other protocols. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9500.
Related Commands ● router bgp — enter ROUTER mode on the switch. maximum-paths Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports. Syntax maximum-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number To return to the default values, enter the no maximum-paths command. Parameters Defaults ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes. ibgp Enter the keyword ibgp to enable multipath support for Internal BGP routes.
To disable, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group. activate Defaults Enter the keyword activate to enable the neighbor/peer group in the new AFI/ SAFI. IPv4 Unicast – Enabled. IPv6 Unicast – Disabled.
Table 2. Neighbor activation and update status for peers activated for IPv6 unicast address family S.No Peer– IPv6 unicast address family Peer group Update status for IPv6 prefixes 1. Activate Activate Send Updates 2. Activate No-Activate Send Updates 3. No-Activate Activate Send Updates 4. No-Activate No-Activate Stop Updates neighbor add-path This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to send/receive multiple path advertisements.
Related Commands ● bgp add-path — allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths implicitly replacing any previous ones. neighbor advertisement-interval Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval command.
Parameters Defaults ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, before BGP route updates are sent. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds. none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Usage Information Other BGP filtering commands include: neighbor filter-list, ip as-path access-list, and neighbor route-map.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To prevent loops, the neighbor ebgp-multihop command does not install the default routes of the multihop peer. Networks not directly connected are not considered valid for best-path selection. neighbor fall-over Enable or disable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors.
neighbor local-as To accept external routes from neighbors with a local AS number in the AS number path, configure Internal BGP (IBGP) routers. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} local-as as-number [no-prepend] To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} local-as command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
neighbor maximum-prefix Control the number of network prefixes received. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
to which the neighbor belongs or you enter the neighbor shutdown and neighbor no shutdown commands. Related Commands ● show ip bgp summary — display the current BGP configuration. neighbor next-hop-self Allows you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self [all] To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self [all] command.
password Enter a text string up to 80 characters long. The first character of the password must be a letter. You cannot use spaces in the password. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) Allows you to assign one peer to an existing peer group. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name} dmzlink-bw To delete a peer from a peer group, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group peergroup-name} command. To disable dmzlink-dw for the peer group, use the no neighbor ip-address dmzlink-dw command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the router to be included in the peer group.
A peer group must exist (be enabled) before you add a peer to it. If the peer group is disabled (shutdown), the peers within that group are also disabled (shutdown). In BGP, you cannot associate a peer to a peer-group without configuring the remote-as for Internal BGP (IBGP) or External BGP (EBGP). This command automatically restarts the neighbor session for the configuration to take effect. Related Commands ● ● ● ● clear ip bgp — reset BGP sessions.
neighbor peer-group passive Enable passive peering on a BGP peer group, that is, the peer group does not send an OPEN message, but responds to one. Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive [ sessions] To delete a passive peer-group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive command. Parameters Defaults peer-group-name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group. Not configured.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to enter the remote AS into routing tables of all routers within the peer group. number Defaults Enter a number of the AS. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 byte). Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. This command enables soft-reconfiguration for the BGP neighbor specified. BGP stores all the updates the neighbor receives but does not reset the peer-session.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
For the new idle holdtime to take effect, you need to shutdown the respective peer manually using neighbor shutdown command and enable the peer again. neighbor update-source Enable the E-Series software to use Loopback interfaces for TCP connections for BGP sessions. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface To use the closest interface, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface command.
neighbor weight Assign a weight to the neighbor connection, which is used to determine the best path. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight weight To remove a weight value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group. weight Defaults Enter a number as the weight.
network Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table. Syntax network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, / 24). The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Usage Information Dell EMC Networking OS software resolves the network address the network command configures with the routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable using non-BGP routes and non-default routes. As BGP does not query next-hop information corresponding to locally originated routes, a local route with an unreachable next-hop is chosen as the best route.
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Although Dell EMC Networking OS does not generate a route due to the backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/sourcing a local route in the presence of network backdoor config on a learned route. permit bandwidth Enables you to specify link band width extended-community attribute as the matching criteria to permit incoming or outgoing traffic.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● match ip address set community set local-preference set metric set next-hop set origin set weight If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
It is possible to keep only one locally originated route in the BGP database. Network command has preference over the re-distributed routes. When the locally originated route is no longer present in the database the other route is automatically installed. Related Commands ● neighbor default-originate — inject the default route. redistribute ospf Redistribute OSPF routes into BGP.
Usage Information You can use the redistribute command to advertise the IGP cost as the MED on redistributed routes. When you set the route-map with metric-type internal and apply outbound to an EBGP peer/peer-group, the advertised routes corresponding to those peer/peer-groups have the IGP cost set as MED. When you enter the redistribute isis process-id command without any other parameters, Dell EMC Networking OS redistributes all OSPF internal routes, external type 1 routes, and external type 2 routes.
shutdown all Disables all the BGP neighbors. Syntax shutdown all Use the no shutdown all command to enable all the configured BGP neighbors. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on the S-Series, Z-Series, MXL, and IOM. You can use this command to disable all the configured BGP neighbors. This command is global for all VRFs.
shutdown address-family-ipv6–unicast Disables all the BGP neighbors corresponding to the unicast IPv6 address families. Syntax shutdown address-family-ipv6–unicast Use the no shutdown address-family-ipv6–unicast command to enable all the configured BGP neighbors corresponding to the unicast IPv6 address families. Command Modes ROUTER BGP CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on the S-Series, Z-Series, MXL, and IOM.
show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv4 address on the system. Syntax Parameters show capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv4-address ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP address to display packet information for that address. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 [. . .] DellEMC# show config View the current ROUTER BGP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
routes}] [network[network-mask]]] [next-hop] [paths] [peer-group peergroup-name] [regexp regular-expression] [summary] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to view ipv4– unicast route information corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 multicast to view information only related to ipv4 multicast routes.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced the [all {received-routes}] option for IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors on S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced the [all {received-routes}] option for IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r redistributed n - network, D - denied, S - stale Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete *> *> Network 55.0.0.0/24 66.0.0.0/24 Next Hop 172.16.0.2 172.16.0.2 Metric LocPrf Weight Path 0 200 i 0 200 i All the show and debugs commands display the link band width extended-community prefixed with DMZ-Link-bw along with other extended communities. DellEMC# show ip bgp 3.3.3.0/24 BGP routing table entry for 3.3.3.
*>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I *>I Related Commands ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 200:0:0:6::/64 200:0:0:7::/64 200:0:0:8::/64 200:0:0:9::/64 200:0:0:a::/64 200:0:0:b::/64 200:0:0:c::/64 200:0:0:d::/64 200:0:0:e::/64 200:0:0:f::/64 200:0:0:10::/64 200:0:0:11::/64 200:0:0:12::/64 200:0:0:13::/64 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 12::2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i show ip bgp communit
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
show ip bgp community View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups. Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export] [no-advertise] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view information either on all routes with community attributes or specific BGP community routes corresponding to that VRF.
Usage Information Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found.
show ip bgp community-list View routes that a specific community list affects. Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {unicast | multicast} | ipv6 unicast] community-list community-list-name [exact-match] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view routes affected by a specific community list corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes.
Example Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route. Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table. Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.
show ip bgp detail Display BGP internal information for the IPv4 Unicast address family. Syntax show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] detail Defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PeerIdBitsP 0x41967120 : softOutSz 16 : RibUpdCtxCBP 0 UpdPeerCtxCBP 0 : UpdPeerCtxAFI 0 : TcpioCtxCB 0 : RedistBlk 1 NextCBPurg 1101119536 : NumPeerToPurge 0 : PeerIBGPCnt 0 : NonDet 0 : DfrdPathSel 0 BGPRst 0 : NumGrCfg 1 : DfrdTmestmp 0 : SnmpTrps 0 : IgnrBestPthASP 0 RstOn 1 : RstMod 1 : RstRole 2 : AFFalgs 7 : RstInt 120 : MaxeorExtInt 361 FixedPartCrt 1 : VarParCrt 1 Packet Capture max allowed length 40960000 : current length 0 Peer Grp List Nbr List Confed Peer List Address Family specific Informatio
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Network *> 55.0.0.0/24 *> 66.0.0.0/24 DellEMC# Next Hop 172.16.0.2 172.16.0.2 Metric LocPrf Weight Path 0 200 400 500 600 i 0 200 500 i show ip bgp flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
* *> 4.0.0.0/8 * * * * 6.0.0.0/20 * *> * * 9.2.0.0/16 * --More-- 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.60 63.114.8.34 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.60 63.114.8.34 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.60 63.114.8.34 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 209 209 209 701 209 209 209 ? 209 209 209 7018 ? 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 3549 i 3549 i 3549 i 701 i 701 i DellEMC# show ip bgp vrf testinconsistent-as BGP table version is 11, local router ID is 66.66.77.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords flap-statistics to view flap statistics on the neighbor’s routes. routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword routes to view only the neighbor’s feasible routes. all {received(OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords all {received-routes} then either the routes [ network network address alone (in dotted decimal format) or the network address along [ network-mask ]} with the network mask (in slash prefix format) to view all the information received from neighbors.
BGP shows the exact information that is exchanged between the BGP peers. It also indicates whether or not this information is received by the BGP peer. The following describes the show ip bgp neighbors command shown in the following examples. The Lines Beginning with: Description BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last phrase in the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router and its neighbor is an external or internal one.
Member of peer-group port0 for session parameters BGP remote router ID 172.16.0.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
● * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences). ● + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences). ● ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either zero or one sequences). NOTE: Enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular expression. [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element. { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count.
Example DellEMC# show ip bgp paths ? community Display community information extcommunity Display extended community information regexp Display path information based on a regular expression | Pipe through a command DellEMC#show ip bgp paths Total 2 Paths Refcount Metric Path 1 0 200 i 1 0 200 i DellEMC# show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database.
Example Field Description Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored. Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these communities. Community Displays the community attributes in this BGP path. DellEMC# show ip bgp paths community Total 2 communities Refcount Community 1 NO-ADVERTISE 1 200:1 1000:1 3000:1 DellEMC# show ip bgp peer-group Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. Introduced on S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the add-path option to the S4810. Output on the S4810 shows the ADDPATH parameters. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
show ip bgp regexp Display the subset of the BGP routing tables matching the regular expressions specified. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] regexp regular-expression [character] vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to view the subset of BGP routing tables that match the regular expression specified on that VRF.
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp regexp command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route. Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then non-BGP routes exist in the router’s routing table. Metric Displays the BGP router’s metric, if assigned.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
Field Description AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor. MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received. MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent. TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor. InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be processed. OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor.
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (ASs). Dell EMC Networking OS MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858. BGPv4 is supported in the following: Dell EMC Networking OS Version Platform Support 7.8.1.0, MBGP for IPv4 Multicast Only S-Series debug ip bgp dampening View information on routes being dampened.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for the E-Series. distance bgp Define an administrative distance for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command.
show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] dampened-paths vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view routes that are affected by a specific community list corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view information related only to ipv4 multicast routes.
Example Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened. From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the dampened route. Reuse Displays the hour:minutes:seconds until the dampened route is available. Path Lists all the ASs the dampened route passed through to reach the destination network. DellEMC# show ip bgp dampened-paths BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 192.168.11.
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) You can use content addressable memory (CAM) commands to configure the amount of memory allocated to CAM memory partitions. NOTE: Not all CAM commands are supported on all platforms. Be sure to note the platform when looking for a command. NOTE: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell EMC Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● IPV6Acl : 0 IPV4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 ipv4udfmirracl: 0 vrfv4Acl :0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 l2acl number Enter the keyword l2acl and then the number of l2acl blocks. The range is from 1 to 8. ipv4acl number Enter the keyword ipv4acl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 ACL. The range is from 0 to 8.
fcoeacl number Enter the keyword fcoeacl and then the number of FP blocks for FCOE ACL. The range is from 0 to 6. Iscsioptacl Enter the keyword iscsioptacl and then the number of FP blocks for iSCSI optimization ACL. The range is from 0 to 2. number ipv4udfmirracl Enter the keyword ipv4udfmirracl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 UDF mirror ACL. The range is from 0 to 8. ipv4mirracl Enter the ipv4mirracl keyword and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 mirror ACL. The range is from 0 to 8.
Usage Information Save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings to take effect. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks; these blocks cannot be reallocated. Only number of blocks can be configured by the user . If allocation values are not entered for the CAM regions, the value is 0.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Supported Modes Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14.1.0 Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13.0.0 Introduced on the MXL, FN IOM, S5000, S4048-ON, S6000, S6000-ON, S3048ON, S3100 Series, C9010, S4048T-ON, Z9500, Z9100-ON, S6100-ON, S6010-ON. The no cam-threshold command will set the CAM threshold to 90 percent and silence period to 0.
Example Example (IPv6 flow-based mirroring information) Example (When the IPv4 QoS and IPv6 ACL optimization is enabled) DellEMC#show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 0 Ipv6Acl : 4 Ipv4Qos : 0 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl : 0 ipv4udfmirracl: 0 ipv4mirracl : 0 ipv6mirracl : 2 DellEMC#show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Cu
Defaults router (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword router to display Layer 3 CAM usage. switch (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword switch to display Layer 2 CAM usage. none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.14(0.0) Updated to display IPv6 flow-based mirroring information on the S5048F-ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S6000, and S6000–ON. Updated to display the shared region between IPv4 QoS and IPv6 ACL entries on the S5048F–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. 9.12(1.
| | | | | | | | Example (show cam-usage router) | | | | | | | | IN-L3 FIB IN-L3 ECMP GRP IN-V6 ACL IN-NLB ACL IPMAC ACL OUT-L2 ACL OUT-L3 ACL OUT-V6 ACL | | | | | | | | 163840 4096 0 0 0 206 102 102 | | | | | | | | 16 0 0 0 0 9 9 4 | | | | | | | | 163824 4096 0 0 0 197 93 98 Dell#show cam-usage router Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============|============== 1 | 0 | IN-L3 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | IN-L3 ECMP GRP
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Unified Forwarding Table Modes Unified Forwarding Table (UFT) consolidates the resources of several search tables (Layer 2, Layer 3 Hosts, and Layer 3 Route [Longest Prefix Match — LPM]) into a single flexible resource. The system supports several UFT modes to extract the forwarding tables, as required. By default, Dell EMC Networking OS initializes the table sizes to UFT mode 2 profile, as it provides a reasonable shared memory for all the tables.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S6000-ON, and Z9500 switch.
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. The CoPP filters prevent traffic that is not identified as legitimate from reaching the control plane, and rate-limit traffic to an acceptable level.
service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues Apply a policy map for the system to rate limit control traffic on a per-queue basis. Syntax service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues policy-name Parameters Defaults policy-name Enter the service-policy name, using a string up to 32 characters. Not configured. Command Modes CONTROL-PLANE-CPUQOS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. This command applies the service-policy based on the type of protocol defined in the ACL rules. Create ACL and QoS policies prior to enabling this command.
Example Version Description 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
ICMPV6 RA ICMPV6 NS ICMPV6 RS ICMPV6 VRRPV6 OSPFV3 DellEMC# any any any any any any any any any any any any _ _ _ _ _ _ Q6 Q5 Q5 Q6 Q10 Q9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ show mac protocol-queue-mapping Display the queue mapping for the MAC protocols. Syntax show mac protocol-queue-mapping Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example 454 This guide is platform-specific.
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. The Dell EMC Networking OS commands for data center bridging features include 802.1Qbb priority-based flow control (PFC), 802.1Qaz enhanced transmission selection (ETS), and the data center bridging exchange (DCBX) protocol.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
clear pfc counters Clear the PFC TLV counters and PFC statistics on an interface or stack unit. Syntax Parameters clear pfc counters [interface-type | stack-unit {unit number | all } all stack-ports all}] interface interface-type Enter the keywords port-type then the interface information. Enter the subport number if a port is fanned-out into 10G ports. stack-unit unit Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack-unit number to be cleared.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
pfc priority Configure the CoS traffic to be stopped for the specified delay. Syntax pfc priority priority-range To delete the pfc priority configuration, use the no pfc priority command. Parameters Defaults priority-range Enter the 802.1p values of the frames to be paused. Separate the priority values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc priority 1,3,5-7. The range is from 0 to 7. none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Specify a stack-unit number on the Master switch in a stack.
show interface pfc Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an interface, including priorities and link delay. Syntax Parameters show interface port-type slot/port[/subport] pfc {summary | statistics | detail | buffer-threshold} port-type slot/ port[ /subport ] pfc Enter the port-type slot and port PFC information. Enter the subport number if a port is fanned-out into 10G ports.
Field Description from peers; received PFC configuration take effect. The admin operational status for a DCBX exchange of PFC configuration is enabled or disabled. 462 Remote is enabled, Priority list Remote Willing Status is enabled Operational status (enabled or disabled) of peer device for DCBX exchange of PFC configuration with a list of the configured PFC priorities. Willing status of peer device for DCBX exchange (Willing bit received in PFC TLV): enabled or disable.
Example (Summary) Field Description PFC TLV Statistics: Error pkts Number of PFC error packets received. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC pause frames transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Rx pkts Number of PFC pause frames received.
show interface pfc statistics Displays counters for the PFC frames received and transmitted (by dot1p priority class) on an interface. Syntax show interface port-type pfc statistics Parameters port-type Enter the port type and the interface information. NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. However, for Open Networking (ON) platforms the notation for specifying port range in the command is different from how you specify in non-ON platforms.
ETS Commands The following ETS commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: Before configuring ETS, assign the etsacl space. using the cam-acl l2acl 2 ipv4acl 0 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 0 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 fcoeacl 2 etsacl 1 iscsi 2 command. dcb-enable Enable data center bridging. Syntax dcb enable[pfc-queues 1–4] To disable DCB, use the no dcb enable command. Parameters Defaults pfc-queues Enter the pfc-queue range. To disable DCB, use the no dcb enable command.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
Example (Summary) Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.2) Down status messages added. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 1 0,1,2 100% ETS 2 3 0 % SP 3 4,5,6,7 0 % SP 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters : ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 1 0,1,2 100% ETS 2 3 0 % SP 3 4,5,6,7 0 % SP 4 5 6 7 Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TL
Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 0% ETS 2 0% ETS 3 0% ETS 4 0% ETS 5 0% ETS 6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0T LIVnput Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class Pkts Example (Detail
7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts DellEMC(conf)#do show int te 1/20/1 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/20/1 Max Supported PG is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admi
DCBX Commands The following DCBX commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. advertise dcbx-tlv On a DCBX port with a manual role, configure the PFC and ETS TLVs advertised to DCBX peers. Syntax advertise dcbx-tlv {ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc} [ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc] [ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc] To remove the advertised ETS TLVs, use the no advertise dcbx-tlv command.
Parameters Defaults config-source | Enter the DCBX port role, where: auto-downstream ● config-source: configures the port to serve as the configuration source on | auto-upstream | the switch. manual ● auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration. The configuration source is elected from auto-upstream ports. ● auto-downstream: configures the port to accept the internally propagated DCB configuration from a configuration source.
Command Modes INTERFACE PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.0.2.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. fcoe priority-bits Configure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in application priority TLVs. Syntax fcoe priority-bits priority-bitmap To remove the configured FCoE priority, use the no fcoe priority-bits command. Parameters Defaults priority-bitmap Enter the priority-bitmap range.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This command is available at the global level only. show interface dcbx detail Displays the DCBX configuration on an interface.
Usage Information To clear DCBX frame counters, use the clear dcbx counters interface stack-unit/port command. The following describes the show interface dcbx detail command shown in the following example. Field Description Interface Interface type with chassis slot and port number. Port-Role Configured the DCBX port role: auto-upstream, auto-downstream, config-source, or manual.
Field Description Peer DCBX Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs received from the peer Status: device. Acknowledgment Number Example Total DCBX Frames transmitted Number of DCBX frames sent from the local port. Total DCBX Frames received Number of DCBX frames received from the remote peer port. Total DCBX Frame errors Number of DCBX frames with errors received. Total DCBX Frames unrecognized Number of unrecognizable DCBX frames received.
dcb-map Create a DCB map to configure priority flow control (PFC) and enhanced transmission selection (ETS) on Ethernet ports that support converged Ethernet traffic. Apply the DCB map to an Ethernet interface. Syntax dcb-map map-nameTo remove a DCB map from an ethernet interface, use the no dcb-map command. Parameters Defaults map-name Enter a DCB map name. The maximum number of alphanumeric characters is 32. None.
Command Modes DCB MAP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.3(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.6(0.0) Added support to configure peak and committed rate on the S6000 platform. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S6000 platforms.
Usage Information The dcb-map stack-unit all stack-ports all command overwrites any previous DCB maps applied to stack ports. dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size Configure the maximum amount of shared buffer size for PFC packets in kilobytes. Syntax Parameters Default dcb pfc-shared—buffer—size buffer-size buffer-size Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. The default is 832KB. Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.6(0.0) Introduced on the S5000. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, and S6000.
threshold-value Buffer offset limit at which the port resumes the peer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 1 to 7787. The default is 10 KB. sharedBuffer shared threshold weight threshold-weight size Weightage of the priorities on the shared buffer size in the system. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 9. The default shared threshold weight is 10. Command Modes DCB-BUFFER-THRESHOLD mode Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, and S6000 platforms. Usage Information You can configure up to a maximum of four lossless (PFC) queues.
Example for Configuration Mode Dell(conf)# dcb-policy buffer-threshold stack-unit all stack-ports all test Example for Interface Mode Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# dcb-policy buffer-threshold test show qos dcb-buffer-threshold Displays the DCB buffer threshold assigned to a QoS policy. Syntax Parameters show qos dcb buffer-threshold {name} name Enter the name of the profile, which can be a string of up to 32 characters in length.
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(2.0P0) Default value is changed from 3088 KB to 2656 KB in the Z9100-ON and S6100-ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6(0.0) Introduced on the S5000. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S4810, and S4820T. Configure the maximum buffer available for PFC traffic.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000 platform.
Field Description pause-threshold- Buffer limit at which the port sends the pause to peer in KB. value resumethreshold-value Buffer offset limit at which the port resumes the peer in KB. shared threshold weight Weightage of the priorities on the shared buffer size in the system. service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight Create a service class and associate the threshold weight of the shared buffer with each of the queues per port in the egress direction.
Example sharedthresholdweight on the queue % of available shared buffer that can be consumed by the queue 2 1.54% 3 3.03% 4 5.88% 5 11.11% 6 20% 7 33.33% 8 50% 9 66.67% 10 80% 11 88.89% DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/8/1)# Service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight queue5 4 queue7 6 dcb pfc-queues Configure the number of PFC queues. Syntax Parameters Default dcb pfc-queues value value Enter the number of PFC queues in the range of 0 through 4.
dcb {ets | pfc} enable Enable priority flow control or enhanced transmission selection on interface. Syntax dcb {ets | pfc} enable ● To disable ETS on interface, use “no dcb ets enable” command. ● To disable PFC on interface, use “no dcb pfc enable” command. Defaults Enable Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
13 Debugging and Diagnostics The basic debugging and diagnostic commands are supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands Offline Diagnostic Commands Hardware Commands Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands The following section describes the diagnostics and monitoring commands. For similar commands, refer to the Control and Monitoring chapter. logging coredump stack-unit Enable coredump on a stack.
is not reachable, the application coredump is aborted. Dell EMC Networking OS completes the coredump process and wait until the upload is complete before rebooting the system. Offline Diagnostic Commands The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are running, Dell EMC Networking OS results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory. This show file command is available only on master and standby.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Added a warning message to the off-line diagnostic. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. You cannot enter this command on a Master or Standby unit. The system reboots when the off-line diagnostics complete. This reboot is an automatic process. A warning message appears when the offline stack-unit command is implemented. Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags.
Hardware Commands These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC. clear hardware stack-unit Clear statistics from selected hardware components.
Related Commands ● show hardware stack-unit — display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member. clear hardware system-flow Clear system-flow statistics from selected hardware components.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced this command. hardware watchdog To trigger a reboot and restart the system, set the watchdog timer.
Parameters Defaults eg-acl | in-acl Enter either the keyword eg-acl or the keyword in-acl to select between ingress or egress ACL data. stack- unit id Enter the keyword stack-unit to select the stack unit ID. port-set 0–0 Enter the keywords port-set with a port-pipe number to display the MAC ACL entries for the specified port-pipe number. . The range is from 0 to 0. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
Defaults unit unit-number {counters | details | portstats [detail] | register} Enter the keyword unit then a number and then enter one of the keywords to troubleshoot errors on the selected port-pipe and to give status on why a port is not coming up to register level. TI monitor Enter the unit keyword to show information regarding the TI register. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example (DataPlane) 500 This guide is platform-specific.
Example (PartyBus) Example (Drops Unit) Example (PortStats) Example (Register) DellEMC# show hardware stack-unit 1 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 errors DellEMC# sh hard stack-unit 1 drops unit 0 PortNumber Ingress Drops IngMac Drops Total Mmu Drops 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 EgMac Drops Egress Drops 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# DellEMC# show hardware stack-unit 1 unit 0 port-stats ena/ speed/ link auto STP lrn i
0x0061204c ASFPORTSPEED.ge18 = 0x00000000 0x0061304c ASFPORTSPEED.ge19 = 0x00000000 0x0061404c ASFPORTSPEED.ge20 = 0x00000000 0x0061504c ASFPORTSPEED.ge21 = 0x00000000 0x0061604c ASFPORTSPEED.ge22 = 0x00000000 0x0061704c ASFPORTSPEED.ge23 = 0x00000005 0x0061804c ASFPORTSPEED.hg0 = 0x00000007 0x0061904c ASFPORTSPEED.hg1 = 0x00000007 0x0061a04c ASFPORTSPEED.hg2 = 0x00000000 0x0061b04c ASFPORTSPEED.hg3 = 0x00000000 0x0061c04c ASFPORTSPEED.cpu0 = 0x00000000 0x00780000 AUX_ARB_CONTROL.
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/Frame Counter Unicast Frame Counter Multicast Frame Counter Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame Counte
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Debug Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 --------------------unit: 0 port: 61 (interface Fo 1/60/1) Description RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX 504 - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV4 L3 Routed Multicast Packets IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Count
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX Example (Details) - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/Frame Counter Unicast Frame Counter Multicast Frame Counter Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame Counter Jabbe
The linkStatus of Front End Port 5 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 6 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 7 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 8 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 9 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 10 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 11 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 12 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 13 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 14 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 15 is FALSE The linkStatus of Fron
show hardware stack-unit buffer Display the counters for the specified port, minimum guaranteed buffer of a priority-group, and the shared buffer.
Example Field Description Accounted Packet Buffer Shared buffer space that is in use by the packets DellEMC# show hardware stack-unit 1 buffer unit 0 port 1 priority-group 0 buffer-info ----- Buffer Accounting Stats for Unit 0 Port 1 priority-group 0 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 0 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the priority-group: 61440 Accounted Packet Buffer: 0 Example displaying total-buffer information for all interface in the specified stack member and unit Example displaying queue range 508
Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8 Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/5/1 Queue 6 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 7667 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8 Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/6/1 Queue 6 ----
Example displaying egress queue-level snapshot for both unicast and multicast packets for the specific interface Example displaying egress queue-level snapshot for unicast packets for the specific interface DellEMC# show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface fortyGigE 1/1 queue all Unit 1 unit: 0 port: 1 (interface Fo 1/1) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------UCAST 0 0 UCAST 1 0 UCAST 2 0 UCAST 3 0 UCAST 4 0 UCAST 5 0 UCAST
--------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 0 0 MCAST 1 0 MCAST 2 0 MCAST 3 0 MCAST 4 0 MCAST 5 0 MCAST 6 0 MCAST 7 0 MCAST 8 0 Example displaying ingress prioritygroup level snapshot for the specific interface DellEMC# show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface fortyGigE 1/1 priority-group 7 Unit 1 unit: 0 port: 1 (interface Fo 1/1) --------------------------------------PG# SHARED CELLS HEADROOM CELLS -----------------------
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500.
show hardware drops Displays internal drops on the specified interface or for a range of interface. Syntax Parameters show hardware drops interface interface drops Enter the keyword drops to display internal drops. interface Enter any of the following keywords and the interface or interface range information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
Example displaying internal drops DellEMC# show hardware drops interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 Drops in Interface Te 1/1/1: --- Ingress Drops --Ingress Drops IBP CBP Full Drops PortSTPnotFwd Drops IPv4 L3 Discards Policy Discards Packets dropped by FP (L2+L3) Drops Port bitmap zero Drops Rx VLAN Drops --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops Ingress MTUExceeds --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DROPS on COS0 HOL DROPS on COS1 HOL DROPS on COS2 HOL DROPS on COS3 HOL DROPS on COS4 HO
Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
############## FP Entry for redirecting LACP traffic to CPU Port ############ EID 2045: gid=1, slice=15, slice_idx=0x02, prio=0x7fd, flags=0x82, Installed tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0, KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200 00020000 00000000 00000000 , FPF4=0x00 MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000 , 0x00 action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced this command.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the Z9100. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. Version 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000 platform. The following information is displayed depending on whether the historical snapshot of buffer statistics is needed for all ports, per-port per-queue, or a priority group. ● All – Displays all resources on ingress and egress for each of the port, queue.
---------------------------------------------Dell#show hardware stack-unit 1 buffer-stats-snapshot unit 0 resource port 5 prio-group all Stack-unit 1 unit 0 port 5 (interface te 1/4/1) -------------------------------------PG# SHARED CELLS HEADROOM CELLS --------------------------------------6 1000 5 7 3 0 show hardware stack-unit buffer-stats-snapshot (Total Buffer Information) View the buffer statistics tracking resource information depending on the type of buffer information, such as device-level detai
Usage Information Version Description 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S4810, and S4820T. The following information is displayed based on the buffer-info type, such as device-level details, queuebased snapshots, or priority group-level snapshot in the egress and ingress direction of traffic: ● Device-ingress – Displays total buffer accounting usage for the unit. ● Device-egress –Display total buffer usage for the unit, total multicast buffer usage for the unit and also on per-service-pool basis.
14 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on the configuration policies the network administrators determine.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Press Enter after the clear ip dhcp binding command clears all the IPs from the binding table. debug ip dhcp server Display Dell OS debugging messages for DHCP.
debug ipv6 dhcp To enable debug logs for DHCPv6 relay agent transactions. Syntax debug ipv6 dhcp To disable the debug logs for dhcpv6 relay agent transactions, use the debug ipv6 dhcp command. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. disable Disable the DHCP server. Syntax disable DHCP Server is disabled by default. To enable the system to be a DHCP server, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters Defaults address Enter a list of DNS servers that may service clients on the subnet. You may list up to eight servers, in order of preference. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. excluded-address Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool.
hardware-address For manual configurations, specify the client hardware address. Syntax Parameters Defaults hardware-address address address Enter the hardware address of the client. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Usage Information When you upgrade the Dell EMC Networking OS from an earlier version to 9.14.1.3 or later, the system converts the DHCP CONFIGURATION host command in the running configuration to the hostaddress command. If you downgrade the Dell EMC Networking OS from version 9.14.1.3 or later to an earlier version, any existing host-address command is deleted from the running configuration. If you want to create manual DHCP bindings, use the host command. ip dhcp server Enable DHCP server globally.
Defaults 24 hours Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. netbios-node-type Specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. Dell EMC Networking recommends specifying clients as hybrid.
network Specify the range of addresses in an address pool. Syntax Parameters Defaults network network /prefix-length network/ prefixlength Specify a range of addresses. Prefix-length range is from 17 to 31. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
show ip dhcp configuration Display the DHCP configuration. Syntax Parameters Defaults show ip dhcp configuration [global | pool name] pool name Display the configuration for a DHCP pool. global Display the DHCP configuration for the entire system. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
show ip dhcp conflict Display the address conflict log. Syntax show ip dhcp conflict address Parameters Defaults address Display a particular conflict log entry. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Commands to Configure Secure DHCP DHCP, as defined by RFC 2131, provides no authentication or security mechanisms.
Related Commands ● arp inspection-trust — specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against the binding table. arp inspection-limit Configure dynamic ARP inspection rate-limit to verify the rate of ARP packet received in a port on a specific interval. Syntax arp inspection-limit {rate pps [interval seconds]} Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE CONFIGURATION Parameters Command History rate pps Enter the keyword rate then the packet per second (pps) value.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ● arp inspection — enable dynamic ARP inspection on a VLAN. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table. Syntax Parameters clear ip dhcp snooping {binding | source-address-validation discardcounters [interface interface]} binding Clears the binding table.
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82. Syntax Parameters Defaults ip dhcp relay information-option [remote-id {port | hostname:port | mac} | circuit-d {port | hostname:port | mac} | trust-downstream] remote-id Enter the keyword remote-id to configure the system to enable the remote-id string in option-82. remote-id port Enter the keywords remote-id port to configure the port as the remote id in option–82.
ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP snooping globally. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan Enable ipv6 DHCP Snooping on VLAN or range of VLANs.
Defaults interface type Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface to which the host is connected: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. lease time Enter the keyword lease then the amount of time the IP address are leased. The range is from 1 to 4294967295.
To delete the DHCP snooping binding entry from DHCP snooping database, use the [no] ipv6 dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ipv6 ipv6-address interface interface-type | interface-number lease valuecommand. Parameters mac address Enter the keyword mac then the MAC address of the host to which the server is leasing the IPv6 address. vlan-id Enter the keywords vlan-id then the VLAN to which the host belongs. The range is from 2 to 4094.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
ip dhcp snooping database renew Renew the binding table. Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust Defaults Untrusted Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip dhcp source-address-validation Enable the IP Source Guard.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Allocate at least one FP block to ipmacacl before you can enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation and SAV with VLAN option. 1. Use the cam-acl l2acl command from CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Save the running-config to the startup-config. 3. Reload the system. ip dhcp relay information-option Enable Option 82.
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on C-Series and S-Series. DellEMC(conf)# ip dhcp relay information-option vpn ip dhcp relay source-interface Configure IPv4 DHCP relay source interface.
Related Commands Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the C9010, MXL, FN IOM, S3100 series, S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. ● ipv6 dhcp relay source-interface— Configure DHCP relay source IPv6 interface. ipv6 dhcp relay source-interface Configure DHCP relay source IPv6 interface.
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Validate a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip helper-address Configures the destination broadcast address or the host address for DHCP server requests. Syntax ip helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ip-address To disable the destination broadcast address or the host address for DHCP server requests, use the ip helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ip-address command.
ipv6-address Default Enter the keywordipv6–address through which the server address can be reached. Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Enhanced to support non-default VRF configuration for DHCPv6 helper address. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
Total cam count 5 permit host 0.0.0.0 permit vlan 10 host permit vlan 10 host permit vlan 10 host host 00:00:00:00:00:00 count (0 packets) 1.1.1.1 host 00:00:00:00:01:01 count (0 packets) 1.1.1.2 host 00:00:00:00:01:02 count (0 packets) 1.1.1.3 host 00:00:00:00:01:03 count (0 packets) NOTE: The output for port-channel interfaces does not display the physical interface.
Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. DellEMC# show ipv6 dhcp snooping IPv6 DHCP Snooping IPv6 DHCP Snooping Mac Verification : Enabled. : Disabled.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. Use this command to associate the system with one or more DNS servers.
Usage Information Example Use this command to configure a domain name corresponding to a VRF. This domain is appended to the in complete DNS requests corresponding to the specified VRF. DellEMC(conf)# ip domain-name vrf jay dell.com ip domain-list Adds a domain name to the DNS list. This domain name is appended to incomplete host names in DNS requests corresponding to a specific VRF.
ip host Configures a mapping between the host name server and the IP address for a specific VRF. This mapping information is used by the name-to-IP address table to resolve host names. Syntax ip host [vrf vrf-name] name ip-address To undo the host name server to IP address mapping for VRFs, use the no ip host [vrf vrfname] name ip-address command.
Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example 560 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.
15 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) supports multiple "best paths" in next-hop packet forwarding to a destination device. Topics: • • • • • • ecmp-group hash-algorithm ip ecmp-group ip ecmp weighted link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold link-bundle-monitor enable ecmp-group Provides a mechanism to monitor traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. A system log is generated when the standard deviation of traffic distribution on a member link exceeds a defined threshold.
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. Using CONFIGURATION mode, create an ECMP group ID. You can then assign interfaces to the ECMP group using CONFIGURATION ECMP-GROUP mode. You can also enable on the port-channel configuration using the CONFIGURATION ECMP-GROUP command mode.
unit stack-unitnumber | portset port-pipe ● xor1: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR1 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor1 ● xor2: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR2 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor2 ● xor4: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR4 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor4 ● xor8: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 ● xor16: Use CR16 — 16 bit XOR Enter the keywords stack-unit, then a stack-unit number, to specify a stackuni
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Added the nh-ecmp option. 7.7.1.1 Added the nh-ecmp option. To ensure that CRC is not used for LAG, set the default hash-algorithm method on E-Series systems. For example,hash-algorithm ecmp xor lag checksum nh-ecmp checksum.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Example DellEMC(conf)# ip ecmp ? weighted Enables Weighted ECMP DellEMC(conf)# ip ecmp weighted DellEMC(conf)#do show running-config | grep ecmp ip ecmp weighted DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC(conf)# no ip ecmp ? weighted Disables Weighted ECMP DellEMC(conf)# no ip ecmp weighted DellEMC(conf)# do show running-config | grep ecmp link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold Provides a mechanism to set the threshold to trigger when traffic distribution begins being monitored on an ECMP link bundle.
Command Modes ● ECMP-GROUP ● PORT-CHANNEL INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
16 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Topics: • • • • • load-balance ingress-port enable load-balance flexhash reload-type fastboot lacp fast-switchover encapsulation dot1q load-balance ingress-port enable Enable the Flex hash functionality. This utility is supported on the platform. Syntax load-balance ingress-port enable To disable the Flex hash capability, use the no version of this command.
load-balance flexhash Specify the parameters for the Flex Hash mechanism, such as whether IPv4 or IPv6 packets must be subject to Flex Hash functionality, a unique protocol number, the offset of hash fields from the start of the L4 header to be used for hash calculation, and a meaningful description to associate the protocol number with the name.
reload-type fastboot Restart the system with optimized booting-time functionality enabled. When you restart the device in fast boot mode, traffic disruption is reduced significantly and the system operations to service the data traffic are restored in a seamless way. C9000 Series Syntax reload-type fastboot Parameters Defaults fastboot Enable the system to restart the next time with the optimized booting-time capability By default, the device reloads in Jumpstart or BMP mode.
Usage Information You can configure the optimal switchover functionality for LACP even if you do not enable the fast boot mode on the system. You must configure the long timeout mechanism for the LACP session to enable the fast boot capability to operate properly. This command applies to dynamic port-channel interfaces only.
17 FIP Snooping In a converged Ethernet network, a switch can operate as an intermediate Ethernet bridge to snoop on FIP packets during the login process on Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) forwarders (FCFs). Acting as a transit FIP snooping bridge, the switch uses dynamically created access control lists (ACLs) to permit only authorized FCoE traffic to transmit between an FCoE end-device and an FCF.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. clear fip-snooping statistics Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface.
info Enter the keyword info for information-specific debugging. ipc Enter the keyword ipc for IPC-specific debugging. ns Enter the keyword ns for name-server-specific debugging. rscn Enter the keyword rscn for RSCN-specific debugging. rx Enter the keyword rx for packet receive-specific debugging. tx Enter the keyword tx for packet transmit-specific debugging. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. Added the receive parameters packettype and interfaces and their options.
fip-snooping enable Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. Syntax fip-snooping enable To disable the FIP snooping feature on all or a specified VLAN, use the no fip-snooping enable command. Defaults FIP snooping is disabled on all VLANs. Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION ● VLAN INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. fip-snooping max-sessions-per-enodemac Configure the maximum session limit per ENode MAC address. Syntax fip-snooping max—sessions—per—enode—mac max-sessions-value To return the configured maximum sessions to the default value, use the no fip-snooping max— sessions—per—enode—mac command.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is four. fip-snooping port-mode fcoe-trusted Configure the port for bridge-to-bridge links. It is not recommended to use this command because multi-hop FSB is not supported.
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Field Description VLAN VLAN ID number the session uses. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID the FCF assigns.
------- ------------- ---- ------ -------------- ------------54:7f:ee:37:34:40 Po 22 100 0e:fc:00 4000 2 show fip-snooping statistics Display statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all interfaces, including VLANs, physical ports, and port channels. Syntax Parameters show fip-snooping statistics [interface vlan vlan-id | interface interfacetype | interface port-channel port-channel-number] vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID of the FIP packet statistics displays.
Field Description Number of ENode Number of FIP-snoop ENode keep-alive frames received on the interface. Keep Alives Number of VN Port Keep Alives Number of FIP-snoop VN port (Virtual N-port) keep-alive frames received on the interface Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snoop multicast discovery advertisements received on the interface. Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snoop unicast discovery advertisements received on the interface.
Number of VN Port Session Timeouts :0 Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 DellEMC(conf)# DellEMC# show fip-snooping statistics int tengigabitethernet 1/11/1 Number of Vlan Requests :1 Number of Vlan Notifications :0 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits :1 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits :0 Number of FLOGI :1 Number of FDISC :16 Number of FLOGO :0 Number of Enode Keep Alive :4416 Number of VN Port Keep Alive :3136 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement :0 Number of Unicast Discov
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
show fips status Display the FIPs status on the platform. Syntax show fips status Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.
18 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to run the spanning tree protocol (STP). The resilient ring protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a high-speed token across a ring to verify the link status. All the intelligence is contained in the master node with practically no intelligence required of the transit mode. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FRRP is media- and speed-independent.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced.
count number Defaults Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 65534. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. disable Disable the resilient ring protocol.
interface Configure the primary, secondary, and control-vlan interfaces. Syntax interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} To return to the default, use the no interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} command.
Usage Information This command causes the Ring Manager to take ownership of the two ports after IFM validates the configuration. Ownership is relinquished for a port only when the interface does not play a part in any control VLAN, that is, the interface does not belong to any ring. Related Commands ● show frrp — display the Resilient Ring Protocol configuration information. member-vlan Specify the member VLAN identification numbers.
To reset the mode, use the no mode {master | transit} command. Parameters Defaults master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode. transit Enter the keywordtransit to set the Ring node to Transit mode. Mode None Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced This command places you into the resilient ring protocol.
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information Executing this command without the optional ring-id command clears the statistics counters on all the available rings. Dell EMC Networking OS requires a command line confirmation before the command executes.
● The number of state change counters Usage Information Executing this command without the optional ring-id command clears the statistics counters on all the available rings. Dell EMC Networking OS requires a command line confirmation before the command is executed.
To remove the timer, use the no timer {hello-interval [milliseconds]}| {deadinterval milliseconds} command. Parameters hello-interval milliseconds dead-interval milliseconds Defaults Enter the keyword hello-interval then the time, in milliseconds, to set the hello interval of the control packets. The milliseconds must be entered in increments of 50 millisecond; for example, 50, 100, 150, and so on. If an invalid value is entered, an error message is generated. The range is from 50 to 2000 ms.
19 GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) The Dell EMC Networking operating system supports the basic GVRP commands on the Dell EMC Networking OS. The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes.
• • • • show show show show config garp timers gvrp gvrp statistics clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface. Syntax clear gvrp statistics interface interface Parameters interface interface Defaults Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
debug gvrp Enable debugging on GVRP. Syntax debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} To disable debugging, use the no debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} command. Parameters Defaults config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration. event Enter the keyword event to enable debugging on the JOIN/LEAVE events.
To re-enable GVRP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100. Defaults As above. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON.
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series ● disable — globally disable GVRP. show config Display the global GVRP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. summary Defaults Enter the keyword summary to display just a summary of the GVRP statistics. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Invalid Messages/Attributes skipped: 0 Failed Registrations: 0 DellEMC# Related Commands 608 ● show gvrp — display the GVRP configuration.
20 ICMP Message Types This section lists and describes the possible ICMP message type resulting from a ping. The first three columns list the possible symbol or type/code. For example, you would receive a ! or 03 as an echo reply from your ping. Table 4. ICMP messages and their definitions Symbol Type Code . 0 U 3 3 Error echo reply . destination unreachable: 0 network unreachable . 1 host unreachable . 2 protocol unreachable . 3 port unreachable .
Table 4. ICMP messages and their definitions (continued) Symbol Type Code Description 0 time-to-live equals 0 during transit . 1 time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly . 12 610 Query Error parameter problem: 1 IP header bad (catchall error) . 2 required option missing . 13 0 timestamp request . 14 0 timestamp reply . 15 0 information request (obsolete) . 16 0 information reply (obsolete) . 17 0 address mask request . 18 0 address mask reply .
21 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) The IGMP commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IGMP Commands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports IGMPv1/v2/v3 and is compliant with RFC-3376. Important Points to Remember ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports protocol-independent multicast-sparse (PIM-SM) and protocol-independent sourcespecific multicast (PIM-SSM) include and exclude modes. ● IGMPv2 is the default version of IGMP on interfaces.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on E-Series. The access list accepted is an extended ACL.
Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Querier normally sends some group-specific queries when a leave message is received for a group prior to deleting a group from the membership database. There may be situations when you require immediate deletion of a group from the membership database. This command provides a way to achieve the immediate deletion.
Version Description E-Series legacy command ip igmp query-interval Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries the Querier sends. Syntax ip igmp query-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds between queries sent out. The range is from 1 to 18000. The default is 60 seconds. 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information If you have configured the hello interval value to be greater than 18000, you must first reset that value to be less than or equal to 18000 before upload. Otherwise, the command execution fails during bootup and the hello interval value is set to the default value. ip igmp query-max-resp-time Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries. NOTE: The IGMP query-max-resp-time value must be less than the IGMP query-interval value.
ip igmp ssm-map To translate (*,G) memberships to (S,G) memberships, use a statically configured list. Syntax ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] ssm-map std-access-list source-address Undo this configuration, that is, remove SSM map (S,G) states and replace them with (*,G) state, use the ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] ssm-map std-access-list source-address command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF.
ip igmp version Manually set the version of the router to IGMPv2 or IGMPv3. Syntax Parameters Defaults ip igmp version {2 | 3} 2 Enter the number 2 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv2. 3 Enter the number 3 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv3. 2 (IGMPv2) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format to view information on that group only. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
Example Example (VLT) Field Description Expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires. Last Reporter Displays the IP address of the last host to be a member of the IGMP group. DellEMC# show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 5 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Uptime Expires 225.0.0.0 Vlan 100 00:00:05 00:02:04 225.0.0.1 Vlan 100 00:00:05 00:02:04 225.0.0.2 Vlan 100 00:00:05 00:02:04 225.0.0.3 Vlan 100 00:00:05 00:02:04 225.0.0.
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IGMP interfaces associated with that VRF. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
Internet address is 35.0.0.1/24 IGMP is enabled on interface IGMP query interval is 60 seconds IGMP querier timeout is 125 seconds IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds IGMP last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP immediate-leave is enabled for all groups IGMP activity: 0 joins IGMP querying router is 35.0.0.1 (this system) IGMP version is 2 Example (VRF) DellEMC# show ip igmp vrf BLUE interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/20 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 50.10.4.
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
Important Points to Remember for IGMP Querier ● The IGMP snooping Querier supports version 2. ● You must configure an IP address to the VLAN interface for IGMP snooping Querier to begin. The IGMP snooping Querier disables itself when a VLAN IP address is cleared, and then it restarts itself when an IP address is reassigned to the VLAN interface. ● When enabled, IGMP snooping Querier does not start if there is a statically configured multicast router interface in the VLAN.
debug ip igmp snooping Enable debugging of IGMP snooping packets on interfaces and groups. Syntax debug ip igmp snooping [group address | interface] ● To disable debugging of IGMP snooping, use the no debug ip igmp snooping [group address | interface] command. ● To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command. Parameters snooping Enter the keyword snooping to enable debugging of IGMP snooping. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP multicast group address in dotted decimal format.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information This last-member-query-interval is also the interval between successive Group-Specific Query messages. To change the last-member-query interval, use this command.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command. Usage Information The Dell EMC Networking OS provides the capability of statically configuring the interface to which a multicast router is attached.
Version Description E-Series legacy command Usage Information This command enables the IGMP switch to send General Queries periodically. This behavior is useful when there is no multicast router present in the VLAN because the multicast traffic is not routed. Assign an IP address to the VLAN interface for the switch to act as a querier for this VLAN. show ip igmp snooping groups Display snooping related information for all the IGMP groups, interface or one group of one interface.
Example Field Description Group Address Lists the multicast address for the IGMP group. Interface Lists the interface type, slot and port number. Mode Displays the IGMP version used. Uptime Displays the amount of time the group has been operational. Expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires. Last Reporter Displays the IP address of the last host to be a member of the IGMP group. Member Ports Indicates the port channel.
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command. Usage Information Example Related Commands If the port channel is a VLT port channel, an asterisk (*) after the port channel number (Po 100*) indicates the port channel is locally down and that a remote VLT port is up.
22 Interfaces To configure egress, port channel, time domain, and UDP, use these interface commands. Topics: • • • Basic Interface Commands Port Channel Commands ip http source-interface Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces. clear counters Clear the counters displayed in the show interfaces commands for all virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) groups, virtual local area networks (VLANs), and physical interfaces, or selected ones.
vrrp [ipv6 {vr-id} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrrp to clear the counters of all VRRP groups. To | vr-id] clear the counters of VRRP groups on all IPv6 interfaces, enter ipv6. To clear the counters of a specified group, enter a VRID number from 1 to 255. Defaults learning-limit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords learning-limit to clear unknown source address (SA) drop counters when MAC learning limit is configured on the interface. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the interface VLAN number.
clear dampening Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface. Syntax clear dampening [interface] Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter any of the following keywords and the interface information to clear counters from a specified interface: ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
dampening Configure dampening on an interface. Syntax Parameters Defaults dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [maxsuppress-time]] half-life Enter the number of seconds after which the penalty is decreased. The penalty decreases half after the half-life period expires. The range is from 1 to 30 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. reuse-threshold Enter a number as the reuse threshold, the penalty value below which the interface state is changed to “up”.
NOTE: You cannot apply dampening on an interface that is monitoring traffic for other interfaces. Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/10/1)# dampening 20 800 4500 120 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/10/1)# ● clear dampening — clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface. ● show interfaces dampening — display interface dampening information. default interface Reset a physical interface to its factory default settings.
DellEMC(conf)# default interface tengigabitethernet 1/5/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/5/1)# show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/5/1 no ip address shutdown Related Commands ● show running-config – display the current configuration. description Assign a descriptive text string to the interface. Syntax description desc_text To delete a description, use the no description command. Parameters Defaults desc_text Enter a text string up to 240 characters long.
● Entering a text string after the description command overwrites any previous text string that you previously configured as the description. ● The shutdown and description commands are the only commands that you can configure on an interface that is a member of a port-channel. ● Use the show interfaces description command to display descriptions configured for each interface. duplex (10/100 Interfaces) Configure duplex mode on the Management Interface interfaces where the speed is set to 10/100.
encapsulation dot1q Configures lite-subinterfaces. Syntax encapsulation dot1q vlan-id To remove a previously configured lite-subinterface, use the no encapsulation dot1q vlan-id command. Parameters dot1q vlan-id Enter the keyword dot1q followed by the VLAN ID to which the host belongs. The range is from 1 to 4094. A lite subinterface is considered as a Layer 3 port property and is synchronous with the existing rules of applying Layer 2 or Layer 3 properties to an interface.
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced arp-inspection option. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the platforms S4048–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S4048T-ON, S3048–ON, S6000, S6010–ON, S5048F-ON, FN-IOM and MXL. 9.13(0.2P2) Introduced on the S3100. Usage Information This command has to be configured before the interface moves to Err-disabled state. If not, the recovery action is not performed. Related Commands errdisable recovery interval— Configure recovery timer interval for an interface.
NOTE: Flow-control packets are mirrored only when flow-control rx is enabled on an interface. Defaults rx off Enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port. tx on Enter the keywords tx on to send control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received. tx off Enter the keywords tx off so that flow control frames are not sent from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received.
When a port receives traffic at a higher rate than it can process, the frames are stored in the port buffer. As a result, buffer usage increases. When the buffer usage reaches the value specified in the “pause-threshold” argument, the port sends PAUSE frame to the connected link partner to stop sending the traffic. Eventually this reduces the buffer usage. When the buffer usage drops by the value specified in the “resume-threshold”, the port again sends a PAUSE frame with 0 as wait-time.
on on off on on off off off on on off on off on on on off off on on off on off on LocNegRx off off off off LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on off off off on off off off off off off on on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on interface Configure a physical or virtual interface on the switch.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Added the support for interfaces. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
To delete a range of VLANs, use the following command: no interface group vlan vlanid {- vlanid} Parameters interface, interface,... Enter the keywords interface group and one of the interfaces — slot/port or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration. Spaces are not required between the commas. Comma-separated ranges can include VLANs and physical interfaces.
interface loopback Configure a Loopback interface. Syntax interface loopback number To remove a loopback interface, use the no interface loopback number command. Parameters Defaults number Enter a number as the interface number. The range is from 0 to 16383. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a Tunnel interface, enter the keyword Tunnel then a number from 1 to 16383. Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION TERMINAL BATCH Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Example (If atleast one port is configured) DellEMC(conf)# interface range tengigbitethernet 2/10/1 - 2/11/2, fortyGigE 3/3, tengigbitethernet 3/10/1 % Warning: Non-existing ports (not configured) are ignored by interface-range DellEMC(conf)# interface range tengigbitethernet 1/10/1 - 1/12/4, fortyGigE 1/13/1, tengigbitethernet 1/15/1 % Warning: Non-existing ports (not configured) are ignored by interface-range Example (If no ports are configured within the specified interface range) DellEMC(conf)# inter
Example (Multiple Range) This example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range.
Command History Example (Single Range) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example (Single Range) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810; added support for OpenFlow. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.2 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you configure keepalive, the system sends a self-addressed packet out of the configured interface to verify that the far end of a WAN link is up. When you configure no keepalive, the system does not send keepalive packets and so the local end of a WAN link remains up even if the remote end is down.
Usage Information Example (Single Interface) Version Description 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. In the Example, the delta column displays changes since the last screen refresh. The following are the monitor command menu options.
Output throttles: m l T q Example (All Interfaces) - 0 Change mode Page up Increase refresh interval Quit 0 pps 0 c - Clear screen a - Page down t - Decrease refresh interval systest-3 Monitor time: 00:01:31 Refresh Intvl.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
negotiation auto Enable auto-negotiation on an interface. Syntax negotiation auto To disable auto-negotiation, use the no negotiation auto command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
or forced-slave), the show interfaces command flaps between an auto-neg-error and forced-master/slave states. You can display master/slave settings with the show interfaces command.
Link Status Between Port 1 and Port 2 ● Up at 1000 Mb/s ● Up at 100 Mb/s ● Up at 100 Mb/s ● Down ● Down * You cannot disable auto-negotiation when the speed is set to 1000 or auto. portmode hybrid To accept both tagged and untagged frames, set a physical port or port-channel. A port configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays. Syntax portmode hybrid To return a port to accept either tagged or untagged frames (non-hybrid), use the no portmode hybrid command.
The following describes the interface vlan command shown in the following example. This example shows unconfiguration of the hybrid port using the no portmode hybrid command. NOTE: Remove all other configurations on the port before you can remove the hybrid configuration from the port.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.
When rate interval is configured in both global configuration mode as well as interface mode, then the rate-interval value configured at interface level is applied as it takes precedence over the global value. show config Display the interface configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000. In order for the speed information corresponding to an interface to appear in the show command output, you must first configure the speed of that interface using the speed command.
no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-1/1/1-1/1/2)# show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. Syntax Parameters show interfaces interface-type[—range] interface Enter one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
Version Description Added support to display 10GBASE-T information on the S4048, S4048T, S6000, S6000-ON, S6100, Z9500, S6010, and Z9100. Included display information about EEE on the S3048–ON. Usage Information 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. Included display information about EEE on the S3100 series, S4820T, and S5000. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.
Line Description TenGigabitEther net 1/1... Interface type and administrative and line protocol status. Hardware is... Interface hardware information, assigned MAC address, and current address. Pluggable media present... Present pluggable media wavelength, type, and rate.
Line Description ○ wred=count both packets discarded in the MAC and in the hardware-based queues Example Example 672 Interfaces Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to 299 seconds). Traffic rate is displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate. Time since... Elapsed time since the last interface status change (hh:mm:ss format).
0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
Mode of IPv4 Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :001232124213 MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:01:03 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 1 packets, 64 bytes 1 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 1 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun,
LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:06:14 Queueing strategy: fifo Input 791 packets, 62913 bytes, 775 multicast Received 0 errors, 0 discarded Output 21 packets, 3300 bytes, 20 multicast Output 0 errors, 0 invalid protocol Time since last interface status change: 00:06:03 Example (OpenFlow instance) Related Commands DellEMC# show interfaces vlan 6 Vlan 6 is down, line protocol is down Address is 00:01:e8:8a:e1:8c, Current
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Changed the organization of the display output. DellEMC# show interfaces configured TenGigabitEthernet 1/18/1 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f7:fc Interface index is 474791997 Internet address is 1.1.1.
between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interfacetype 1/1 - 4. ● For ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port/[subport] - slot/port/[subport]. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1/1 - 1/1/4.
show interfaces stack-unit Display information on all interfaces on a specific S-Series or Z-Series stack member. Syntax show interfaces stack-unit unit-number Parameters unit-number Enter the stack member number. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example 678 Interfaces This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:83 Current address is 00:01:e8:4c:f2:83 !-------------output truncated ----------------! Related Commands ● show hardware stack-unit — display data plane and management plane input/output statistics. show interfaces status To display status information on a specific interface only, display a summary of interface information or specify a stack-unit slot and interface.
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 28 30 32 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 28 30 32 stack-unit 1 quad-port-profile 2,4,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,26,28,30,32 Related Commands stack-unit portmode — splits a single 40G port into four-10G ports stack-unit portmode quad Configures the list of dynamic fan-out capable ports. Syntax stack-unit [stack-unit number] port port-number portmode quad To remove the quad-port configuration, use the command.
For the new quad port profile configuration to take effect, you must first save changes and then reload the switch. Example Dell(conf)#stack-unit 1 port 24 portmode quad Warning: Enabling quad mode on stack-unit 1 port 24. Please verify whether the configs related to interface Fo 1/24 are cleaned up before proceeding further.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series. 8.1.1.
● show interfaces transceiver — display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays the transceiver’s serial number. show interfaces transceiver Display the details of an installed transceiver. Syntax Parameters show interfaces [interface number] transceiver interfaces (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and then the interface interface number information: ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Output augmented with diagnostic data for pluggable media. 7.7.1.0 Removed three fields in the output: Vendor Name, Vendor OUI, and Vendor PN. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.5.4.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Line Description TX Power High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. RX Power High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Temp Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Voltage Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Bias Low Warning Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Line Description Tx Bias High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the present Tx bias current value displayed above. Tx Power High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx bias power value displayed above. Rx Power High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value displayed above. Temperature Low This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value Alarm Flag displayed above.
SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 Length(OM1) 10m Length(Copper-1m/AOC-1m/OM4-10m) Vendor Name Vendor PN Trans Type Vendor Rev Laser Wavelength CheckCodeBase Serial Extended ID fields Options BR max BR min Vendor SN Datecode CheckCodeExt Extended Transceiver Code = = = = = = = = 0x00 0x1e Methode Elec. SP7051-D 10GBASE-T - 33 3276.
QSFP 13/1 RX Power Low Warning threshold =================================== QSFP 13/1 Temperature QSFP 13/1 Voltage QSFP 13/1 TX1 Bias Current QSFP 13/1 TX2 Bias Current QSFP 13/1 TX3 Bias Current QSFP 13/1 TX4 Bias Current QSFP 13/1 RX1 Power QSFP 13/1 RX2 Power QSFP 13/1 RX3 Power QSFP 13/1 RX4 Power QSFP 13/1 TX1 Power QSFP 13/1 TX2 Power QSFP 13/1 TX3 Power QSFP 13/1 TX4 Power Related Commands = -9.5001dBm = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 25.781C 3.320V 7.980mA 7.644mA 7.648mA 7.852mA -1.0265dBm -0.
Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-1/2/1,fo-1/2/6)# show range 2/2/1 - 0 2/56 - 0 ● interface — configure a physical interface on the switch. ● show ip interface — display Layer 3 information about the interfaces. shutdown Disable an interface. Syntax shutdown To activate an interface, use the no shutdown command. Defaults The interface is disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
● show ip interface — display the interface routing status. Add the keyword brief to display a table of interfaces and their status. speed (Management interface) Set the speed for the Management interface. Syntax speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | auto} To return to the default setting, use the no speed command. Parameters Defaults 10 Enter the keyword 10 to set the interface’s speed to 10 Mb/s. 100 Enter the keyword 100 to set the interface’s speed to 100 Mb/s.
stack-unit portmode Split a single 40G port into four 10G ports. Syntax Parameters Defaults stack-unit stack-unit port number portmode quad stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset. number Enter the port number of the port to be split. The total number of ports are 32. The range is from 1 to 32. port Enter the keyword port then the port number to specify the port where fanout mode is specified. Disabled.
switchport Place an interface in Layer 2 mode. Syntax switchport [[backup interface {interface | port-channel number}] | mode private-vlan {host | promisucous | trunk}] To remove an interface from Layer 2 mode and place it in Layer 3 mode, enter the no switchport command. If a switchport backup interface is configured, first remove the backup configuration. To remove a switchport backup interface, enter the no switchport backup interface command.
Usage Information Version Description 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.4.1.0 Added support for port-channel interfaces (the port-channel number option). 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Added the backup interface option. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
group Group two LAGs in a supergroup (“fate-sharing group” or “failover group”). Syntax group group_number port-channel number port-channel number To remove an existing LAG supergroup, use the no group group_number command. Parameters group_number Enter an integer from 1 to 32 that uniquely identifies this LAG fate-sharing group. port-channel Enter the keywords port-channel then an existing LAG number. Enter this keyword/variable combination twice, identifying the two paired LAGs.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Increased the number of port channels to 4096. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
● interface null — configure a null interface. ● interface vlan — configure a VLAN. ● shutdown — disable/enable the port channel. minimum-links Configure the minimum number of links in a LAG (Port Channel) that must be in “oper up” status for the LAG to be also in “oper up” status. Syntax Parameters Defaults minimum-links number number Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status. The range is from 1 to 16. The default is 1.
Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Increased the number of port channels to 4096. 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.
Example Field Description packets input... Displays the number of packets and bytes into the interface. Input 0 IP packets... Displays the number of packets with IP headers, VLAN tagged headers, and MPLS headers. The number of packets may not add correctly because a VLAN tagged IP packet counts as both a VLAN packet and an IP packet. 0 64-byte... Displays the size of packets and the number of those packets entering that interface. This information is displayed over two lines. Received 0...
Example Field Description (untitled) Displays the status of the physical interfaces (up or down). ● In Layer 2 port channels, an * (asterisk) indicates which interface is the primary port of the port channel. The primary port sends out interface PDU. ● In Layer 3 port channels, the primary port is not indicated.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Increased the number of port channels to 4096. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults The IP address on the system that is closest to the Telnet address is used in the outgoing packets.
23 IPv4 Routing The basic IPv4 commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS on the platform.
• • • • • • • show show show show show show show ip management-route ip protocols ip route ip route list ip route summary ip traffic tcp statistics arp To associate an IP address with a MAC address in the switch, use address resolution protocol (ARP). Syntax arp [vrf vrf-name] ip-address mac-address interface To remove an ARP address, use the no arp ip-address command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter a VRF name to configure an ARP entry for that VRF.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You cannot use Class D or Class E IP addresses or zero IP address (0.0.0.0) when creating a static ARP. Zero MAC addresses (00:00:00:00:00:00) are also invalid. You can use the vrf attribute of this command to create a static ARP entry on either a default or a non-default VRF.
Version Description 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information This timer is an exponential backoff timer. Over the specified period, the time between ARP requests increases. This behavior reduces the potential for the system to slow down while waiting for a multitude of ARP responses. Related Commands ● show arp retries — display the configured number of ARP retries. arp learn-enable Enable ARP learning using gratuitous ARP.
arp max-entries Enables you to configure the maximum number of ARP entries per VRF that are allowed for IPv4.. Syntax arp max-entries [vrf vrf-name] max-number Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the name of a specific VRF for which you want to configure maximum number of ARP entries that IPv4 allows. max-number Enter the maximum number of ARP entries that a VRF RTM can hold. The range is from 0 to 65535. Not configured.
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information Retries are 20 seconds apart.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear arp-cache Clear the dynamic ARP entries from a specific interface or optionally delete (no-refresh) ARP entries from the content addressable memory (CAM).
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4094 VLANs on the E-Series (the prior limit was 2094). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. clear ip fib stack-unit Clear all FIB entries in the specified stack unit (use this command with caution, refer to Usage Information.) Syntax clear ip fib stack-unit unit-number vrf vrf-name Parameters unit-number Enter the number of the stack unit.
Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to clear the routes corresponding to that VRF. * Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes. ip-address mask Enter a specific IP address and mask in dotted decimal format to clear that IP address from the routing table. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters all Enter the keyword all to clear all TCP statistics maintained on all switch processors. cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the cp to clear only statistics from the Control Processor. rp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp to clear only the statistics from Route Processor. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
count value Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count then the count value. The range is from 1 to 65534. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
to 113.3.3.254 DellEMC# Related Commands ● ip helper-address – specify the destination broadcast or host address for the DHCP server request. ● ip helper-address hop-count disable – disable the hop-count increment for the DHCP relay agent. debug ip icmp View information on the internal control message protocol (ICMP). Syntax debug ip icmp [interface] [count value] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip icmp command.
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.3.1.0 Added the count option. Example Usage Information ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: ICMP: echo request rcvd from src 40.40.40.40 src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo echo request sent to dst 40.40.40.40 echo request rcvd from src 40.40.40.40 src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo echo request sent to dst 40.40.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4094 VLANs on the E-Series (the prior limit was 2094). 8.1.1.
ICMP type=0, code=0 IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.3 (Ma 1/1), len 1500, sending fragment IP Fragment, Ident = 4741, fragment offset = 1480 IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.5 (Te 4/11/1), len 64, sending broad/multicast proto=89 IP: s=40.40.40.40 (local), d=224.0.0.6 (Te 4/11/1), len 28, sending broad/multicast proto=2 IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.30, len 100, unroutable ICMP type=8, code=0 IP: s=0.0.0.0, d=30.30.30.
ip address Assign a primary and secondary IP address to the interface. Syntax ip address ip-address mask [secondary] To delete an IP address from an interface, use the no ip address [ip-address] command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in slash prefix format (for example, /24). secondary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword secondary to designate the IP address as the secondary address. Not configured.
To disable the interface from receiving directed broadcast packets, use the no ip directedbroadcast command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the interface does not receive directed broadcast packets) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. You can only configure one domain name with the ip domain-name command.
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Added support for IPv6. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.3.1.0 Introduced for the E-Series. Usage Information This command disables the incrementing of the hops field when boot requests are relayed to a DHCP server through Dell EMC Networking OS.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced for the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms.
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip interface — display the interface routing status and configuration. ip route Assign a static route to the switch.
Configure the IPv6 route using a next-hop IPv6 address in order for the ping command to detect the destination address. interface ip- address distance Enter the keyword interface then the IP address. (OPTIONAL) Enter the value of the distance metric assigned to the route. The range is from 1 to 255. name description (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name and the description for the IPv4 static route configuration.
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4094 VLANs on the E-Series (the prior limit was 2094). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Using the following example of a static route: ip route 33.33.33.0 /24 tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 172.31.5.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
responding to the initial SYN packet that requests a connection to the router for a specific service (such as SSH or BGP) with a SYN ACK, the router waits for a period of time for the ACK packet to be sent from the requesting host that will establish the TCP connection. ip unknown-unicast Enable IPv4 catch-all route. Syntax ip unknown-unicast [vrf vrf-name] To remove the IPv4 catch-all route (0.0.0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. A warning message is displayed when you enter this command stating that this setting takes effect for existing routes only when IPv4 route prefixes are cleared from the routing table (RTM).
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.
● source-mac — Uses the source MAC address, VLAN, Ethertype, source module ID and source port ID fields to hash. The hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the packet should be forwarded. Defaults tcp-udp enable Enter the keywords to distribute traffic based on the following: ● enable — Takes the TCP/UDP source and destination ports into consideration when doing hash computations. This option is enabled by default.
mac [source-mac | source-port-id | source-module-id | dest-mac | dest-portid | dest-module-id | vlan | ethertype | source-dest-mac ] | tunnel [ipv4over-ipv4 | ipv4-over-gre-ipv4 | mac-in-mac]} Parameters Defaults {{ip-selection| ipv6-selection [ source-ip | source-ipv6 | To use IPv4 key fields in hash computation, enter the keyword ip-selection then one of the parameters. To use IPv6 key fields in hash computation, enter the keyword ipv6-selection then one of the parameters.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. management route Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a forwarding router. Syntax management route {ip-address mask | ipv6-address 1.1.1.1prefix-length} {forwarding-router-address | managementethernet | fortyGigE | vlan | tengigabitethernet } To remove a static route, use the no management route command.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000 and added support for IPv6. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information When a static route (or a protocol route) overlaps with Management static route, the static route (or a protocol route) is preferred over the Management Static route.
retries (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword retries to show the number of ARP retries before a 20–second back off. dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to view dynamic entries. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of ARP entries. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Description Example Example (Private VLAN) Hardware Address Displays the MAC address associated with the ARP entry. Interface Displays the first two letters of the interfaces type and the slot/port associated with the ARP entry. VLAN Displays the VLAN ID, if any, associated with the ARP entry. CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on. DellEMC> show arp Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU ------------------------------------------------------------Internet 192.2.1.
show arp retries Display the configured number of ARP retries. Syntax show arp retries Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Added support for IPv6 addresses. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
show ip cam stack-unit Display CAM entries for a port-pipe of a stack-unit on a S-Series or Z-Series switch. Syntax show ip cam stack-unit {stack-unit-number} [port-set {pipe-number} | vrf vrf-name {ip-address mask [longer-prefixes [ecmp-group detail]]}| ecmp-group {detail | member-info [detail [group-index index-number]]}| summary] Parameters stack-unitnumber Enter the stack-unit ID. The unit ID range is from 1 to 6. The unit ID range is from 1 to 6.
Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip cam command shown in the following example. Field Description Destination Displays the destination route of the index. EC Displays 1 if the route is an ECMP route. Else, displays 0. C This is the CPU bit. If it displays 1, then it indicates that a packet hitting this entry will be forwarded to the CPU. V Id Displays the VLAN ID. If the entry is 0, the entry is not part of a VLAN. Mac Addr Displays the next-hop router’s MAC address.
ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the network destination to view only information on that destination. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Enter the mask in slash prefix format (/X). longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords longer-prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view the total number of prefixes in the FIB.
1.1.1.2/32 2.1.1.2/32 0.0.0.0/0 1.1.1.0/24 1.1.1.1/32 2.1.1.0/24 2.1.1.1/32 100.1.1.0/24 100.1.1.0/24 DellEMC# S S S Example (Show command output with Weighted ECMP Enabled) via 1.1.1.2, Vl via 2.1.1.2, Vl Direct, Vl 1000 via 127.0.0.1 Direct, Vl 20 via 127.0.0.1 via 1.1.1.2, Vl via 2.1.1.2, Vl DellEMC#show ip route 10.1.1.0/24 20.1.1.0/24 100.1.1.0/24 via via via via via 1000 20 1000 20 1.1.1.2 2.1.1.2 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 0.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 1.1.1.2 2.1.1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a stack-unit interface, enter the keyword stack-unit then the stack unit number. ● For a tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel then the tunnel interface number. The range is from 1 to 16383.
ICMP redirects are not sent ICMP unreachables are not sent IP unicast RPF check is not supported DellEMC# DellEMC# show ip interface port-channel 128 Port-channel 128 is down, line protocol is down Internet address is 10.1.1.1/16 Broadcast address is 10.1.255.
show ip management-route View the IP addresses assigned to the Management interface. Syntax Parameters show ip management-route [all | connected | summary | static] all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all IP addresses assigned to all Management interfaces on the switch. connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only routes directly connected to the Management interface.
show ip protocols View information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the switch. Syntax show ip protocols Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
show ip route View information, including how they were learned, about the IP routes on the switch. Syntax Parameters show ip route [vrf vrf-name] hostname | ip-address [mask] [longer-prefixes] | list prefix-list | protocol [process-id | routing-tag] | all | connected | static | summary] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and then the VRF name to list the routes in the route table of a specific VRF.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.
Example DellEMC# show ip route all Codes:C- connected, S - static, R - RIP B- BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP, LO - Locally Originated O- OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2- OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1 E2- OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1 L2- IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default >- non-active route + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change -----------
----------- ----------S 1.1.1.0/24 00:00:01 C 4.4.4.0/24 00:01:32 C 6.6.6.0/24 00:01:25 4.4.4.2, via Te 1/4/1 , weight 100 6.6.6.2, via Te 1/16/1, Direct, Te 1/4/1 Direct, Te 1/16/1 1/0 weight 200 0/0 0/0 DellEMC# show ip route 1.1.1.0/24 Routing entry for 1.1.1.0/24 Known via "static", distance 1, metric 0 Last update 00:05:01 ago Routing Descriptor Blocks: * 4.4.4.2, via TenGigabitEthernet 1/4/1 weight 100 * 6.6.6.
Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Related Commands ● show ip route — display information about the routes found in the switch. show ip traffic View IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP traffic statistics. Syntax show ip traffic [all | cp | rp1 | rp2] NOTE: These options are supported only on the E-Series. Parameters all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view statistics from all processors. If you do not enter a keyword, you also view all statistics from all processors.
Keyword Definition unknown protocol... No receiver for these packets. Counts packets whose protocol type field is not recognized by Dell EMC Networking OS. not a gateway... Packets can not be routed; the host/network is unreachable. security failures...
0 echo, 0 echo reply, 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench 0 parameter, 0 timestamp, 0 info request, 0 other Sent: 0 redirects, 0 unreachable, 0 echo, 0 echo reply 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench, 0 timestamp 0 info reply, 0 time exceeded, 0 parameter problem UDP statistics: Rcvd: 0 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port 0 short packets, 0 bad length, 0 no port broadcasts, 0 socket full Sent: 0 total, 0 forwarded broadcasts TCP statistics: Rcvd: 23829 total, 0 checksum errors, 0 no port Sent: 16
Field Description Rcvd: Displays the number and types of TCP packets received by the switch. ● Total = total packets received ● no port = number of packets received with no designated port 0 checksum error... Displays the number of packets received with the following: ● checksum errors ● bad offset to data ● too short 329 packets... Displays the number of packets and bytes received in sequence. 17 dup... Displays the number of duplicate packets and bytes received. 0 partially...
0 packets ( 0 bytes) with data after window 0 packets after close 0 window probe packets, 41 window update packets 41 dup ack packets, 0 ack packets with unsend data 10184 ack packets (12439508 bytes) Sent: 12007 Total, 0 urgent packets 25 control packets (including 24 retransmitted) 11603 data packets (12439677 bytes) 24 data packets (7638 bytes) retransmitted 355 ack only packets (41 delayed) 0 window probe packets, 0 window update packets 7 Connections initiated, 8 connections accepted, 15 connections es
24 IPv6 Basics IPv6 basic commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For information about the Dell EMC Networking OS version and platform that supports IPv6 in each software feature, see the IPv6 Addressing section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Usage Information You can partition the LPM table to store IPv6 prefixes greater than /64 mask length. Requires reboot of the switch to take effect as the SDK handles this only during its initialization. clear ipv6 route Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table. Syntax Parameters clear ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] {* | ipv6-address prefix-length} vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to clear the IPv6 routes corresponding to that VRF.
Parameters Defaults limit Maximum number of IPv6 routes allowed in a VRF. Valid range is from 1 to 8000 (or maximum allowable for that platform if smaller value). warningthreshold Warning threshold value is expressed as a percentage of the limit value. When the number of IPv6 routes reaches the specified percentage of the limit, a warning message is generated. Valid range is 1 to 100.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000. You can use this command to view the number of supported extended prefix entries in LPM configured. The output also displays the current applied value and the new value that is applicable after the reboot of the device.
Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11.0.1 Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4810, S4820, S5000, S6000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, C9010, Z9500, MXL, and FN IOM.
ipv6 nd reachable-time Configure the amount of time before an IPv6 neighbor is considered unreachable. Syntax ipv6 nd reachable-time reachable-time To restore to default, use the no ipv6 nd reachable-time command. Parameters Default reachable-time Enter the reachable time in milliseconds. The value is from 0 to 3600000. The default value is 0. Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Configure the IPv6 route using a next-hop IPv6 address in order for the ping command to detect the destination address. ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the forwarding router IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the metric distance assigned to the route. The range is from 1 to 255. name description (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name and the description for the IPv6 static route configuration.
Dell EMC Networking OS withdraws the route. The route is re-installed, by Dell EMC Networking OS, when the recursive resolution is satisfied. After an IPv6 static route interface is created, if an IP address is not assigned to a peer interface, the peer must be manually pinged to resolve the neighbor information. You can specify a weight for an IPv4 or IPv6 static route. If the weight value of a path is 0, then that path is not used for forwarding when weighted ECMP is in effect.
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the C- and E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. DellEMC# show ipv6 IPv6 Destination ---------------2001:34::0/64 2001:68::0/64 DellEMC# management-route Gateway ------ManagementEthernet 1/1 2001:34::16 State ----Connected Active show ipv6 route Displays the IPv6 routes.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.
Example (SSeries) DellEMC# show ipv6 route Codes: C - connected, L - local, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Dist/Metric, Gateway, Last Change ----------------
25 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For IPv4 ACL commands, see Access Control Lists (ACL). Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Certain platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. For more information, see cam-acl. Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on the Loopback interface is not supported. Reference to an empty ACL permits any traffic.
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
-- Line card 4 -Current L2Acl : Ipv4Acl : Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : Settings(in block sizes) 2 2 4 2 3 DellEMC# Related Commands ● cam-acl — configure CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs. permit icmp To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter.
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Added the monitor option.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. ipv6 control-plane egress-filter Enable egress Layer 3 ACL lookup for IPv6 CPU traffic. Syntax ipv6 control-plane egress-filter Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Defaults deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition. ospfv3 Specify that this ACL is for OSPFv3 control plane traffic All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
l2acl 1-4 ipv4acl 1- 4 ipv6acl 0-4 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal 4. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
cam-acl Allocate space for IPv6 ACLs. Syntax Parameters cam-acl {default | l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10} default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows: ● L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6 ● L2 ACL(l2acl): 5 ● IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 ● L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 ● L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range.
26 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the communication between open systems, supporting routers passing through both IP and OSI traffic. A router is considered as an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing domains called areas. Intermediate systems send, receive, and forward packets to other routers within their area (Level 1 and Level 1-2 devices).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • isis ipv6 metric isis metric isis network point-to-point isis password isis priority is-type log-adjacency-changes lsp-gen-interval lsp-mtu lsp-refresh-interval max-area-addresses max-lsp-lifetime maximum-paths metric-style multi-topology net passive-interface redistribute redistribute bgp redistribute ospf router isis set-overload-bit show config show isis database show isis graceful-restart detail show isis hostname show isis interface show is
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To perform protocol-support consistency checks on hello packets, use this command. The adjacencycheck is enabled by default.
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced You cannot disable leaking from Level 1 to Level 2. Also, you cannot enable leaking from Level 2 to Level 1.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. To prevent the link state database from receiving incorrect routing information from unauthorized routers, use the area-password command on routers within an area. The configured password injects into Level 1 LSPs, CSNPs, and PSNPs. Related Commands ● domain-password — set the authentication password for a routing domain. ● isis password — configure an authentication password for an interface.
tag (Optional) Enter an alphanumeric string to specify the IS-IS routing tag area. * Enter the keyword * to clear all IS-IS information and restart the IS-IS process. This command removes IS-IS neighbor information and IS-IS LSP database information and the full SPF calculation is done. database Clears IS-IS LSP database information. traffic Clears IS-IS counters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Usage Information To configure a shortcut name that you can use instead of entering a long string of numbers associated with an NSAP address, use this command.
debug isis adj-packets Enable debugging on adjacency-related activity such as hello packets that are sent and received on IS-IS adjacencies. Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] adj-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf-name]adj-packets [interface] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the debug information on IS-IS for an adjacency tied to that VRF. This command displays the IIH related debug details.
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the debugging information on IS-IS corresponding to that VRF. This information contains local updates tied to the VRF that you specify. This command displays the local LSP debugging details of the current unit. interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type as one of the following: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 6.3.1.0 Introduced.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. default-information originate Generates a default route into an IS-IS routing domain and controls the distribution of default information.
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. When you use this command to redistribute routes into a routing domain, the router becomes an autonomous system (AS) boundary router. An AS boundary router does not always generate a default route into a routing domain. The router still requires its own default route before it can generate one. How a metric value assigned to a default route advertises depends on the metric-style command configuration.
distance Define the administrative distance for learned routes. Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask [prefix-list]] To return to the default values, use the no distance weight command. Parameters Defaults weight The administrative distance value indicates the reliability of a routing information source. The range is from 1 to 255. (A higher relative value indicates lower reliability. Routes with smaller values are given preference.) The default is 115.
Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Specify the prefix list to filter prefixes in routing updates. interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type and the interface following: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
Defaults ospf process-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ospf then the OSPF process-ID number. The range is from 1 to 65535. bgp as number (OPTIONAL) Enter the BGP then the AS Number. The range is from 1 to 65535. rip (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rip for RIP routes. static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static for user-configured routing process. Not configured.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information The domain password is inserted in Level 2 link state PDUs (LSPs), complete sequence number PDUs (CSNPs), and partial sequence number PDUs (PSNPs).
network. A flag in the Restart TLV contains restart request (RR), restart acknowledge (RA) and suppress adjacency advertisement (SA) bit flags. The ISIS graceful restart-enabled router can co-exist in mixed topologies where some routers are graceful restart-enabled and others are not. For neighbors that are not graceful restart-enabled, the restarting router brings up the adjacency per the usual methods.
Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the graceful restart time in seconds. The range is from 5 to 300 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. 30 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. graceful-restart t3 Configure the overall wait time before graceful restart completes. Syntax graceful-restart t3 {adjacency | manual} seconds To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t3 command.
Related Commands ● graceful-restart restart-wait — enable the graceful restart maximum wait time before a restarting peer comes up. hello padding Use to turn ON or OFF padding for LAN and point-to-point hello PDUs or to selectively turn padding ON or OFF for LAN or point-to-point hello PDUs. Syntax hello padding [multi-point | point-to-point] To return to the default, use the no hello padding [multi-point | point-to-point] command.
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. IS-IS normally purges LSPs with an incorrect data link checksum causing the LSP source to regenerate the message. A cycle of purging and regenerating LSPs can occur when a network link continues to deliver accurate LSPs even though there is a link causing data corruption.
NOTE: IP address is not mandatory for forming IS-IS adjacency. Related Commands ● net — configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for the routing process. ● router isis — enable the IS-IS routing protocol. ipv6 router isis Enable the IPv6 IS-IS routing protocol and specify an IPv6 IS-IS process. Syntax ipv6 router isis [tag] To disable IS-IS routing, use the no router isis [tag] command. Parameters Defaults tag (OPTIONAL) This parameter is a unique name for a routing process.
isis circuit-type Configure the adjacency type on interfaces. Syntax isis circuit-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} To return to the default values, use the no isis circuit-type command. Parameters Defaults level-1 You can form a Level 1 adjacency if there is at least one common area address between this system and neighbors. You cannot form Level 2 adjacencies on this interface.
To return to the default values, use the no isis csnp-interval [seconds] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters Defaults seconds Interval of transmission time between CSNPs on multi-access networks for the designated intermediate system. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 10. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the interval of time between transmission of CSNPs for Level 1. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the interval of time between transmission of CSNPs for Level 2.
Defaults seconds = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Usage Information Hello PDUs are “padded” only when both the global and interface padding options are ON. Turning either one OFF disables padding for the corresponding interface. Related Commands ● hello padding — turn ON or OFF padding for LAN and point-to-point hello PDUs. isis ipv6 metric Assign metric to an interface for use with IPv6 information.
isis metric Assign a metric to an interface. Syntax isis metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis metric [default-metric] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters default-metric Metric assigned to the link and used to calculate the cost from each other router via the links in the network to other destinations. You can configure this metric for Level 1 or Level 2 routing. The range is from 0 to 16777215 irrespective of the metric style. The default is 10.
isis network point-to-point Enable the software to treat a broadcast interface as a point-to-point interface. Syntax isis network point-to-point To disable the feature, use the no isis network point-to-point command. Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. You can configure priorities independently for Level 1 and Level 2.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. The IS-IS protocol automatically determines area boundaries and are able to keep Level 1 and Level 2 routing separate. Poorly planned use of this feature may cause configuration errors, such as accidental area partitioning.
lsp-gen-interval Set the minimum interval between successive generations of link-state packets (LSPs). Syntax lsp-gen-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds [initial_wait_interval seconds [second_wait_interval seconds]] To restore default values, use the no lsp-gen-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds [initial_wait_interval seconds [second_wait_interval seconds]] command. Parameters level-l (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1 to apply the configuration to generation of Level-1 LSPs.
and there are no triggers for two times the maximum interval, fast behavior is restored (the initial wait time). lsp-mtu Set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of IS-IS link-state packets (LSPs). This command only limits the size of LSPs this router generates. Syntax lsp-mtu size To return to the default values, use the no lsp-mtu command. Parameters size The maximum LSP size, in bytes. The range is from 512 to 16000 for Non-Jumbo mode and from 128 to 9195 for Jumbo mode. The default is 1497.
Parameters Defaults seconds The LSP refresh interval, in seconds. This value must be 300 seconds less than the value specified in the max-lsp-lifetime command. The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 900. 900 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Change the maximum LSP lifetime with this command. The maximum LSP lifetime must always be greater than the LSP refresh interval. The seconds parameter enables the router to keep LSPs for the specified length of time. If the value is higher, the overhead is reduced on slower-speed links.
Version Description 6.3.1.0 Introduced. metric-style To generate and accept old-style, new-style, or both styles of type, length, and values (TLV), configure a router. Syntax metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters Defaults narrow Allows you to generate and accept old-style TLVs.
Related Commands ● isis metric — configure a metric for an interface. multi-topology Enables multi-topology IS-IS. It also allows enabling/disabling of old and new style TLVs for IP prefix information in the LSPs. Syntax multi-topology [transition] To return to a single topology configuration, use the no multi-topology [transition] command. Parameters Defaults transition Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS Level 1 and Level 2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level 2 routes only. This setting is the default. metric metric- (OPTIONAL) The value used for the redistributed route. Use a metric value that is consistent with the destination protocol. The range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0.
redistribute bgp 1 level-1 metric 32 metric-type external route-map rmap-isis-to-bgp redistribute ospf Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Added support for IPv6 ISIS. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. How a metric value assigned to a redistributed route is advertised depends on how on the configuration of the metric-style command.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Configure a network entity title (the net command) to specify the area address and the router system ID. Enable routing on one or more interfaces to establish adjacencies and establish dynamic routing. You can configure only one IS-IS routing process to perform Level 2 routing. A level-1-2 designation performs Level 1 and Level 2 routing at the same time.
overload bit in its LSPs, other routers ignore the unreliable router in their SPF calculations until the router has recovered. NOTE: Enables you to configure a single system wide value that is common for both IPv4 and IPv6 address. show config Display the changes you made to the IS-IS configuration. Default values are not shown. Syntax show config Command Modes ● ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) ● CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
multi-topology transition set-overload-bit spf-interval level-1 100 15 20 spf-interval level-2 120 20 25 exit-address-family show isis database Display the IS-IS link state database. Syntax Parameters show isis [vrf vrf-name] database [level-1 | level-2] [local] [detail | summary] [system-id] [lspid] vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS link state database corresponding to that VRF.
Usage Information The following describes the show isis database command shown in the following example. Field Description IS-IS Level-1/ Level-2 Link State Database Displays the IS-IS link state database for Level 1 or Level 2. LSPID Displays the LSP identifier. The first six octets are the System ID of the originating router. The first six octets are the System ID of the originating router. The next octet is the pseudonode ID. If this byte is not zero, the LSP describes system links.
Metric: 10 IS (MT-IPv6) OSPF.00 Metric: 10 IP 15.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 Metric: 10 IPv6 (MT-IPv6) 1511::/64 Metric: 10 IPv6 (MT-IPv6) 2511::/64 Metric: 10 IPv6 (MT-IPv6) 1011::/64 Metric: 10 IPv6 1511::/64 Metric: 10 IP 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 Hostname: ISIS IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.00-00 * 0x0000002D 0xB2CD 1075 0/0/0 Area Address: 49.0000.0001 NLPID: 0xCC 0x8E IP Address: 10.1.1.
Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. DellEMC# show isis hostname System Id Dynamic Name Static Name *F100.E120.
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Introduced on the Z9000. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
MAC Address: 0000.0000.0000 Hold Time: 28 Link Local Address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:492c Topology: IPv4 IPv6 , Common (IPv4 IPv6 ) Adjacency being used for MTs: IPv4 IPv6 DellEMC# show isis protocol Display IS-IS routing information. Syntax show isis [vrf vrf-name] protocol Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS routing information corresponding to that VRF.
Generate narrow metrics: level-1-2 Accept narrow metrics: level-1-2 Generate wide metrics: none Accept wide metrics: none Multi Topology Routing is enabled in transition mode. DellEMC# show isis traffic This command allows you to display IS-IS traffic interface information. Syntax Parameters show isis [vrf vrf-name] traffic [interface] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS traffic interface information corresponding to that VRF.
Example Item Description Level-1/Level-2 Hellos (sent/ rcvd) Displays the number of Hello packets sent and received. PTP Hellos (sent/rcvd) Displays the number of point-to-point Hellos sent and received. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs sourced (new/refresh) Displays the number of new and refreshed LSPs. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) Displays the number of flooded LSPs sent and received. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs CSNPs (sent/ rcvd) Displays the number of CSNP LSPs sent and received.
To restore default values, use the no spf-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds [initial_wait_interval seconds [second_wait_interval seconds]] command. Parameters level-l (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to apply the configuration to Level-1 SPF calculations. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to apply the configuration to Level-2 SPF calculations. interval seconds Enter the maximum number of seconds between SPF calculations. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds.
27 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) This section contains commands for Dell EMC Networks’ implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for creating dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs) — known as “port-channels” in the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For static LAG commands based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications, see Port Channel Commands .
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show lacp — display the LACP configuration. debug lacp Debug LACP (configuration, events, and so on). Syntax debug lacp [config | events | pdu [interface-type [in | out]]] To disable LACP debugging, use the no [config | events | pdu [interface-type [in | out]]] command.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. lacp long-timeout Configure a long timeout period (30 seconds) for an LACP session.
Related Commands ● show lacp — display the LACP configuration. lacp port-priority To influence which ports will be put in Standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating, configure the port priority. Syntax lacp port-priority priority-value To return to the default setting, use the no lacp port-priority priority-value command. Parameters Defaults priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority.
Parameters Defaults priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 32768. 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show lacp — display the LACP information. ● show interfaces port-channel — display information on configured Port Channel groups. show lacp Display the LACP matrix.
Example (Port-ChannelNumber) Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show lacp 1 Port-channel 1 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID:Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b Partner System ID:Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
28 Layer 2 This section describes commands to configure Layer 2 features. Topics: • • • MAC Addressing Commands Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD) MAC Addressing Commands The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses. mac-address-table aging-time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.1.0 On the E-Series, available in INTERFACE VLAN context, reduced the minimum aging time in the INTERFACE VLAN context from 10 seconds to 1 second. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● mac learning-limit — set the MAC address learning limits for a selected interface. ● show mac-address-table aging-time — display the MAC aging time.
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1(0.0) Added support for output range parameter for S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. For more information about using this command, see NIC Teaming in the Layer 2 section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Deprecated the no-station-move command (replaced by the mac-learninglimit mac-address-sticky command). 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the vlan option on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added the station-move option. 6.5.1.0 Added support for MAC Learning-Limit on the LAG.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information If you configure mac-learn-limit and the sticky MAC feature is enabled, dynamically learned MAC addresses are converted to sticky for that port.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information This command is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs.
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. mac port-security Enable or disable the port security feature globally in the system. Syntax mac port-security To disable the port security, use the no mac port-security command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. interface interface-type (OPTIONAL) Instead of entering the keyword interface then the interface type, slot/port[/subport] information, as above, you can enter the interface type, then just a slot number. vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.
Column Heading Description ● Te = ten-gigabit Ethernet ● Fo = forty-gigabit Ethernet State Example Usage Information Example (Count) Related Commands Lists if the MAC address is in use (Active) or not in use (Inactive).
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
default vlan-id Specify a VLAN as the Default VLAN. Syntax default vlan-id vlan-id To remove the default VLAN status from a VLAN and VLAN 1 does not exist, use the no default vlan-id vlan-id syntax. Parameters Defaults vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN to become the new Default VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. The default is 1. Default VLAN is VLAN 1. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters Defaults description Enter a text string description to identify the VLAN (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced The no default vlan disable command is not listed in the running-configuration, but when the default VLAN is disabled, default-vlan disable is listed in the running-configuration. name Assign a name to the VLAN. Syntax name vlan-name To remove the name from the VLAN, use the no name command. Parameters Defaults vlan-name Enter up to 32 characters as the name of the VLAN. Not configured.
show config Display the current configuration of the selected VLAN. Syntax show config Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
id vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword id then a number from 1 to 4094. Only information on the VLAN specified is displayed. name vlan-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name then the name configured for the VLAN. Only information on the VLAN named is displayed. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 876 Layer 2 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Column Heading Description ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Ports Example x (not capitalized x) for Dot1x untagged X (capitalized X) for Dot1x tagged o (not capitalized o) for OpenFlow untagged O (capitalized O) for OpenFlow tagged H for VSN tagged i (not capitalized i) for Internal untagged I (capitalized I) for Internal tagged v (not capitalized v) for VLT untagged V (capitalized V) for VLT tagged Displays the type, slot, and port information.
Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM 41 Status Description Q Ports Active T Te 1/47/1 DellEMC# show vlan id 42 Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM 42 DellEMC# Example (Brief) Example (Name) Status Description Q Ports Active U Te 1/47/1 DellEMC# show vlan br VLAN Name STG MAC Aging IP Address ---- ----
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
untagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface. Syntax untagged interface To remove an untagged interface from a VLAN, use the no untagged interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD) The Dell EMC Networking operating software supports far-end failure detection (FEFD) on the Ethernet interfaces of the platform. The FEFD feature detects and reports far-end link failures. ● FEFD is not supported on the Management interface. ● During an RPM failover, FEFD is operationally disabled for approximately 8 to 10 seconds. ● By default, FEFD is disabled. debug fefd Enable debugging of FEFD.
fefd Enable Far-End Failure Detection on an interface, set the FEFD interval, or select the FEFD mode. Syntax fefd {disable|interval|mode {aggressive|normal} Parameters Defaults disable Enter the keyword disable to disable FEFD for the specified interface. interval Enter the keyword interval, followed by a value to specify the FEFD interval in seconds. Range is from 3 to 300. Default is 15. mode Enter the keyword mode followed by the mode type to specify the FEFD mode.
To re-enable FEFD on an interface, use the no fefd disable command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Usage Information You can set up the interval between control packets using the fefd interval command.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Related Commands ● fefd — enable far-end failure detection. fefd reset Reset all interfaces or a single interface that was in “error-disabled” mode.
fefd-global interval Configure an interval between FEFD control packets. Syntax fefd-global interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no fefd-global interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a number as the time between FEFD control packets. The range is from 3 to 300 seconds. The default is 15 seconds. 15 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
When an interface is placed in “error-disabled” state, t enter the fefd reset command to reset the interface state. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.
Related Commands 890 Layer 2 ● ● ● ● fefd — enable far-end failure detection. fefd disable — disable FEFD on an interface only. fefd-global — enable FEFD globally on the system. fefd reset — reset all interfaces or a single interface that was in “error-disabled” mode.
29 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) The link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell EMC Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Added the vlan-name option. 7.6.1.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. advertise interface-port-desc Advertise port descriptor.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Example Version Description 9.13.0.0 Enhanced to display organizational specific unrecognized LLDP TLVs. 9.11.2.5 Enhanced to display unrecognized TLVs. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. mode To receive or transmit, set LLDP.
Related Commands Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol lldp (Configuration) — enable LLDP globally. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. multiplier Set the multiple of the hello timer before LLDP declares the interface dead. Syntax multiplier number To return to the default, use the no multiplier command.
protocol lldp (Configuration) Enable the LLDP globally on the switch. Syntax protocol lldp To disable LLDP globally on the chassis, use the no protocol lldp command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Usage Information Example Example (Detail) Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1.(0.
78, 4) 88, 4) 98, 4) (108, 4) (118, 4) ( 79, 4) ( 80, 4) ( 81, 4) ( 82, 4) ( 83, 4) ( 84, 4) ( 85, 4) ( 86, 4) ( 87, 4) ( ( 89, 4) ( 90, 4) ( 91, 4) ( 92, 4) ( 93, 4) ( 94, 4) ( 95, 4) ( 96, 4) ( 97, 4) ( ( 99, 4) (100, 4) (101, 4) (102, 4) (103, 4) (104, 4) (105, 4) (106, 4) (107, 4) (109, 4) (110, 4) (111, 4) (112, 4) (113, 4) (114, 4) (115, 4) (116, 4) (117, 4) (119, 4) (120, 4) (121, 4) (122, 4) (123, 4) (124, 4) (125, 4) (126, OrgUnknownTLVList: -------
Remote TTL: 300 Information valid for next 199 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 00:01:41 UnknownTLVList: OrgUnknownTLVList: ((00-01-66),127, 4) ((00-01-66),126, 4) ((00-01-66),125, 4) ((00-01-66),124, ((00-01-66),123, 4) ((00-01-66),122, 4) ((00-01-66),121, 4) ((00-01-66),120, 4) ((00-01-66),119, ((00-01-66),118, 4) --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Example (Detail) for a single interface 4) 4) DellEMC(conf)#do show lldp neighbors inte
Example Version Description 9.11(2.5) Enhanced to display total number of suppressed traps on the, S3048–ON, S4048ON, S4048T-ON, S6010–ON and Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.
Usage Information SNMP notification for the changes in the lldp remote entry table is throttled by 5 seconds (default), or the configured time set using this command. If more than one notification message is generated within the configured time, only the first one will be sent and the remaining messages are suppressed. LLDP-MED Commands The following are the LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) commands.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● protocol lldp (Configuration) — enable LLDP globally.
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. Usage Information ● ECS — Emergency call service such as defined by TIA or the national emergency numbering association (NENA) ● ELIN — Emergency location identification number, a valid North America Numbering Plan format telephone number supplied for ECS purposes.
advertise med softphone-voice To advertise softphone to enable IP telephony on a computer so that the computer can be used as a phone, configure the system. Syntax advertise med softphone-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med softphone-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094.
advertise med streaming-video To advertise streaming video services for broadcast or multicast-based video, configure the system. This command does not include video applications that rely on TCP buffering. Syntax advertise med streaming-video {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med streaming-video {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID.
advertise med video-conferencing To advertise dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances that support real-time interactive video, configure the system. Syntax advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094.
advertise med video-signaling To advertise video control packets that use a separate network policy than video data, configure the system. Syntax advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority.
advertise med voice To advertise a dedicated IP telephony handset or other appliances supporting interactive voice services, configure the system. Syntax advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7.
To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. priority-tagged Enter the keywords priority-tagged, the Layer 2 priority, and then the DSCP value. number Defaults Unconfigured.
30 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Microsoft NLB clustering allows multiple servers running Microsoft Windows to be represented by one MAC and one IP address to provide transparent failover and load-balancing.
command in Global configuration mode. This setting causes the multicast MAC address to be mapped to the cluster IP address for NLB mode of operation of the switch. Related Commands ● clear arp-cache — clear dynamic ARP entries from the ARP table. ● show arp — display the ARP table.
Example (Multicast) Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.3(0.0) Added support for multicast MAC address on the MXL platform.
31 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) connects multiple PIM sparse-mode (PIM-SM) domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds. A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are parallel with MBGP connections. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports MSDP commands on the S6000–ON platform.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced clear ip msdp sa-cache Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries.
Version Description 7.8.1.0 Added the local option. 7.7.1.0 Added the rejected-sa option. 6.2.1.1 Introduced clear ip msdp statistic Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries. Syntax Parameters Defaults clear ip msdp statistic peer peer-address peer Enter the keyword peer to clear the MSDP peer entries. peer-address Enter the IP address of the MSDP peer.
ip msdp cache-rejected-sa Enable an MSDP cache for the rejected source-active entries. Syntax ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} To clear the MSDP rejected source-active entries, use the no ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} command then the ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the number of rejected SA entries to cache. The range is from 0 to 32766. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
list name Defaults Enter the keywords list name and specify a standard access list that contains the RP address that should be treated as the default peer. If no access list is specified, then all SAs from the peer are accepted. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced ip msdp mesh-group To be a member of a mesh group, configure a peer.
Usage Information Version Description 6.2.1.1 Introduced An MSDP mesh group is a mechanism for reducing SA flooding, typically in an intra-domain setting. When some subset of a domain’s MSDP speakers are fully meshed, they can be configured into a mesh-group. If member X of a mesh-group receives a SA message from an MSDP peer that is also a member of the mesh-group, member X accepts the SA message and forwards it to all of its peers that are not part of the mesh-group.
Version Description 6.2.1.1 Introduced ip msdp peer Configure an MSDP peer. Syntax ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source] [description] [sa-limit number] To remove the MSDP peer, use the no ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source interface] [description name] [sa-limit number] command. Parameters peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added option for SA upper limit and the description option. 6.2.1.1 Introduced The connect-source option is used to supply a source IP address for the TCP connection. When an interface is specified using the connect-source option, the primary configured address on the interface is used.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced Modifications to the ACL do not have an immediate effect on the sa-cache. To apply the redistribute filter to entries already present in the SA cache, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache local command. ip msdp sa-filter Permit or deny MSDP source active (SA) messages based on multicast source and/or group from the specified peer.
ip msdp sa-limit Configure the upper limit of source-active (SA) entries in SA-cache. Syntax ip msdp sa-limit number To return to the default, use the no ip msdp sa-limit number command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the maximum number of SA entries in SA-cache. The range is from 1 to 500000. 50000 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters Defaults peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced show ip msdp Display the MSDP peer status, SA cache, or peer summary. Syntax Parameters Defaults show ip msdp {peer peer address | sa-cache | summary} peer peer address Enter the keyword peer then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
Local Addr: 100.1.1.2(639) Connect Source: none State: Established Up/Down Time: 00:00:08 Timers: KeepAlive 60 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: none Output (S,G) filter: none DellEMC# Example (Sacache) Example (Summary) DellEMC# show ip msdp sa-cache MSDP Source-Active Cache - 1 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 224.1.1.1 172.21.220.10 172.21.3.
Example DellEMC# show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 200 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom Reason 00:00:13 225.1.2.1 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail 00:00:13 225.1.2.2 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail 00:00:13 225.1.2.3 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail 00:00:13 225.1.2.4 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail 00:00:13 225.1.2.5 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.2 Rpf-Fail 00:00:13 225.1.2.6 10.1.1.4 110.1.1.1 13.1.1.
32 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link. Similar to the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), which handles multicast group memberships in IPv4 networks, MLD is used for multicast management on IPv6 networks.
debug ipv6 mld Enable debugging on IPv6 MLD packets. Syntax debug ipv6 mld [vrf vrf-name] {group-address | interface} To turn off debugging, use the no debug ipv6 mld {group-address | interface} command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format. The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval Change the MAX Response Time inserted into the Group-Specific Queries sent in response to a Leave Group messages. This interval is also the interval between Group-Specific Query messages. Syntax ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval {milliseconds} To return to the default, use the no ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval {milliseconds} command. Parameters Defaults milliseconds Enter the last member query interval in milliseconds. The range is from 100 to 65535.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(3.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010. ipv6 mld version Configure the MLD version on the system. Syntax ipv6 mld version {1 | 2} Defaults MLD version 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(3.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010.
MLD Snooping MLD snooping allows the switch to examine the MLD packets and forwards the decision based on their content. You can configure MLD snooping in subnets that receive MLD queries from either MLD or the MLD snooping querier. MLD snooping limits the IPv6 multicast traffic at Layer 2 by configuring Layer 2 LAN ports and dynamically forwards the IPv6 multicast traffic to the ports that want to receive it.
● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
ipv6 mld snooping explicit-tracking Enable explicit MLD snooping tracking on an interface. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping explicit-tracking To disable MLD snooping explicit tracking, use the no ipv6 mld snooping explicit-tracking command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.
To disable the querier feature, use the no ipv6 mld snooping querier command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010.
show ipv6 mld snooping interface View the configured MLD snooping interfaces. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 mld snooping interface [interface] interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
Vlan 2 Gi 1/18 Dell# 944 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol
33 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP), as implemented by the Dell EMC Networking OS, conforms to IEEE 802.1s. This command supports the Dell EMC Networking OS.
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced. ● protocol spanning-tree mstp — enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced. ● max-age — change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information. ● hello-time — change the time interval between bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). hello-time Set the time interval between generation of MSTB bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).
● max-age — change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information. max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the MSTB. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters Defaults max-age Enter a number of seconds the Dell EMC Networking OS waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
To disable mapping or bridge priority, use the no msti instance {vlan range | bridgepriority priority} command. Parameters msti instance Enter the MSTP instance. The range is from zero (0) to 63. vlan range Enter the keyword vlan then the identifier range value. The range is from 1 to 4094. bridge-priority Enter the keywords bridge-priority then a value in increments of 4096 as the bridge priority. The range is from zero (0) to 61440.
Defaults No default name. Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
This command is supported in all STP modes such as STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST. The command behavior does not change when a new member port is added to the port-channel or an existing member port is deleted from the configuration. The path cost reflects the cumulative speed of the port-channel member ports.
revision The revision number for the multiple spanning tree configuration. Syntax revision range To return to the default values, use the no revision command. Parameters Defaults range Enter the revision number for the MST configuration. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0. 0 Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Enable the multiple spanning tree protocol prior to using this command.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Support for the optional keyword guard was added on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display the port error disable state (EDS) loopback BPDU inconsistency causes.
Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID -----------------------------------------------------------Te 1/1/1 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e801.6aa8 128.257 Interface Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge Boundary -----------------------------------------------------------Te 1/1/1 ErrDis 128.257 128 20000 EDS 0 P2P No No DellEMC# show spanning-tree msti 0 MSTI 0 VLANs mapped 1-4094 Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Parameters Defaults spanning-tree Enter the keywords spanning-tree to enable the MSTP on the interface. Enable. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
Defaults ● cost = depends on the interface type ● priority = 128 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information 960 Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced By default, Dell EMC Networking OS implements an optimized flush mechanism for MSTP.
34 Multicast The multicast commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IPv4 Multicast Commands IPv6 Multicast Commands IPv4 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv4 multicast commands. clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command.
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● show ip pim tib — show the PIM tree information base. ip mroute Assign a static mroute.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This feature allows you to limit the number of multicast entries on the system. This number is the total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system. On each line card, the multicast module only installs the maximum number of entries, depending on the configured CAM profile.
Usage Information After you enable multicast, you can enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. In INTERFACE mode, enter the ip pim sparse-mode command to enable IGMP and PIM on the interface. Related Commands ● ip pim sparse-mode — enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. mtrace Trace a multicast route from the source to the receiver.
-4 103.103.103.3 --> Source -----------------------------------------------------------------The mtrace command traverses the path of the response data block in the reverse direction of the multicast data traffic. The mtrace command traverses the reverse path to the source from the destination.
-----------0 Te 1/10/1, 0 Te 1/10/1, 0 Te 1/11/1, 224.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 1000 1 Te 1/3/1, 224.1.1.2 0.0.0.0 1000 1 Te 1/3/1, 224.1.1.1 165.13.34.5 2000 2 Te 1/3/5, show ip mroute View the multicast routing table.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2.(0.0) Added support for keyword vlt to the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. 8.4.1.1 Support for the keyword snooping and the optional vlan vlan-id, groupaddress, and source-address parameters were added on E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
Example Field Description (S, G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table. uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding table. Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) information towards the source for (S,G) entries and the RP for (*,G) entries.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Network administrators use static mroutes to control the reach-ability of the multicast sources.
ipv6 multicast-routing Enables IPv6 multicast forwarding. Syntax ipv6 multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] To disable multicast forwarding, use the no ipv6 multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] command. Defaults Parameters Disabled. vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable IP multicast forwarding on that VRF. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
9.11.3.0 Example Introduced on the C9000, S3048–ON, S3100, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000– ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON.
L2 Ports : L3 Ports : Te 1/10/1 show ipv6 rpf View reverse path forwarding. Syntax show ipv6 rpf Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the C9000, S3048–ON, S3100, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000– ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON.
35 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The neighbor discovery protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4.
NOTE: If you do not specify this option, the neighbors in the default VRF are cleared. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format to remove a specific IPv6 neighbor. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
count value Defaults Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 65534. The default is infinity. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches. ● ipv6 nd raguard policy policy-name — define the RA guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy configuration mode. ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands. hop–limit Enable the verification of the advertised hop count limit. If this command is not configured, the verification process is bypassed.
vlan [vlan 1, vlan 2, vlan 3........] Defaults Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN range. The VLAN range is from 1 to 4094. None Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
ipv6 nd ra–guard policy Define the RA guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy list configuration mode. Syntax Parameters ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name policy policy- name Defaults Enter the keyword policy then the policy-name. The policy name allows a maximum of 140 characters. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel then the tunnel interface number. The range is from 1 to 16383.
managed-config-flag Set the managed address configuration flag. Syntax managed-config-flag {on | off} To clear the flag, use the no managed-config-flag {on | off} command. Parameters Defaults on Enter the keyword on to set the managed-config-flag value as ON. off Enter the keyword off to set the managed-config flag value as OFF. None Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, and Z9000 switches. ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands. ● ipv6 nd raguard policy policy-name — define the RA guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy configuration mode.
other–config–flag Enable the verification of the advertised other configuration parameter. If this command is not configured, the verification process is bypassed. Syntax other-config-flag {on | off} To reset the other configuration parameter, use the no other-config-flag {on | off} command. Parameters Defaults on Enter the keyword on to set the other-config-flag value as ON. off Enter the keyword off to set the other-config flag value as OFF.
Related Commands Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches.
ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands. router–lifetime Set the router lifetime. Syntax router—lifetime value Parameters Defaults value Enter the router lifetime in seconds. The range is from 0 to 9,000 seconds. None Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z9000 switches.
router-preference maximum medium trusted-port DellEMC(conf-ra_guard_policy_list)# Related Commands ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands. ● ipv6 nd ra-guard policy — define the RA guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy list configuration mode. ● device-role — specify the role of the device attached to the port. ● hop-limit — enable the verification of the advertised hop count limit. ● mtu — set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) value.
router-preference maximum medium trusted-port Interfaces : Te 1/1/1 DellEMC# DellEMC# show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy test ipv6 nd ra-guard policy test device-role router hop-limit maximum 1 match ra ipv6-access-list access other-config-flag on router-preference maximum medium trusted-port Interfaces : Te 1/1/1 DellEMC# Related Commands ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands.
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Management interface, enter the keyword managementethernet followed by slot/port numbers. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel followed by a number. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
36 Object Tracking Object Tracking supports IPv4 and IPv6, and is available on the Dell EMC Networking platforms. Object tracking allows you to define objects of interest, monitor their state, and report to a client when a change in an object’s state occurs.
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. DellEMC# debug track all 04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-STATE: track 6 - Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1 line-protocol DOWN 04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-NOTIF: VRRP notification: resource ID 6 DOWN delay Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked object to clients.
If the timer expires and an object’s state has changed, a notification is sent to the client. If no delay is configured, a notification is sent immediately after a change in the state of a tracked object is detected. The time delay in communicating a state change is specified in seconds. Related Commands ● track interface ip routing – configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface.
Parameters object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
show track Display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current tracked state (UP or DOWN), and the clients which are tracking an object. Syntax show track [object-id [brief] | interface [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | ip route [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | resolution | vrf vrf-name [brief] | brief] Parameters object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. The range is 1 to 500.
Example Output Description First hop interface Displays the type and slot/port number of the first-hop interface of the tracked route. Tracked by Client that is tracking an object’s state; for example, VRRP. DellEMC# show track Track 1 IP route 23.0.0.
To return to the default setting, use the no threshold metric {up number | down number} command. Parameters Defaults up number Enter a number for the UP threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. down number Enter a number for the DOWN threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. The default DOWN threshold is255.
track interface ip routing Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface. Syntax track object-id interface interface ip routing To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
vrf vrf-name Defaults (Optional) E-Series only: You can configure a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance to specify the virtual routing table to which the tracked route belongs. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. ip-address/ prefix-len Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. The valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to /32. vrf vrf-name (Optional) E-Series only: You can configure a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) instance to specify the virtual routing table to which the tracked route belongs.
Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. Use this command to configure the protocol-specific resolution value that converts the actual metric of an IPv4 route in the routing table to a scaled metric in the range 0 to 255.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. The following describes the show track ipv6 route command shown in the Example below.
Example (Brief) Ouput Description State Up or Down state of the tracked object. Last Change Time since the last change in the state of the tracked object. DellEMC# show track ipv6 route brief ResId Resource Parameter State LastChange 2 IPv6 route metric threshold 2040::/64 Up 00:02:36 3 IPv6 route reachability 2050::/64 Up 00:02:36 Related Commands ● show running-config track – display configuration information about tracked objects.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information Use this command to create an object that tracks the routing state of an IPv6 Layer 3 interface: ● The status of the IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IP address.
When you configure the threshold of an IPv6 route metric as a tracked object, the UP/DOWN state of the tracked route is also determined by the current metric for the route in the routing table. To provide a common tracking interface for different clients, route metrics are scaled in the range 0 to 255, where 0 is connected and 255 is inaccessible. The scaled metric value communicated to a client always considers a lower value to have priority over a higher value.
A tracked route is considered to match an entry in the routing table only if the exact IPv6 address and prefix length match a table entry. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 3333:100:200:300:400::/80 does not match routing table entry 3333:100:200:300::/64. If no route-table entry has the exact IPv6 address and prefix length, the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
The protocol-specific resolution value calculates the scaled metric by dividing a route's cost by the resolution value set for the route protocol: ● For ISIS, you can set the resolution in the range 1 to 1000, where the default is 10. ● For OSPF, you can set the resolution in the range 1 to 1592, where the default is 1. ● The resolution value used to map static routes is not configurable. By default, Dell EMC Networking OS assigns a metric of 0 to static routes.
37 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open Shortest Path First version 2 for IPv4 is supported on platform. OSPF is an interior gateway protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information between routers in a single autonomous system (AS). OSPF is also a link-state protocol in which all routers contain forwarding tables derived from information about their links to their neighbors.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the remaining DNOS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear ip ospf Clear all OSPF routing tables.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear ip ospf statistics Clear the packet statistics in interfaces and neighbors.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. debug ip ospf Display debug information on OSPF. Entering the debug ip ospf commands enables OSPF debugging for the first OSPF process.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the database-timer rate-limit option for the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Field Description ● MC+ (bit used by MOSPF is set and router is able to forward IP multicast packets) ● MC- (bit used by MOSPF is not set and router cannot forward IP multicast packets) ● E + (router is able to accept AS External LSAs) ● E - (router cannot accept AS External LSAs) ● T + (router can support TOS) ● T - (router cannot support TOS) Example hi: Displays the amount of time configured for the HELLO interval. di: Displays the amount of time configured for the DEAD interval.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. description Add a description about the selected OSPF configuration. S6000–ON Syntax description description To remove the OSPF description, use the no description command.
Related Commands Version Description pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf asbr — display the VLAN configuration. distance Define an administrative distance for particular routes to a specific IP address. S6000–ON Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] To delete the settings, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] command. Parameters weight Specify an administrative distance. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110.
distance ospf Configure an OSPF distance metric for different types of routes. S6000–ON Syntax distance ospf [external dist3] [inter-area dist2] [intra-area dist1] To delete these settings, use the no distance ospf command. Parameters Defaults external dist3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword external then a number to specify a distance for external type 5 and 7 routes. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110.
distribute-list in Apply a filter to incoming routing updates from OSPF to the routing table. S6000–ON Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] To delete a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list.
distribute-list out To restrict certain routes destined for the local routing table after the SPF calculation, apply a filter. S6000–ON Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] To remove a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list. bgp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bgp to specify that BGP routes are distributed.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The distribute-list out command applies to routes autonomous system boundary routers (ASBRs) redistributes into OSPF. It can be applied to external type 2 and external type 1 routes, but not to intra-area and inter-area routes.
Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Higher convergence levels should only be selected following consultation with Dell EMC Networking technical support. flood-2328 Enable RFC-2328 flooding behavior. S6000–ON Syntax flood-2328 To disable, use the no flood-2328 command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific.
graceful-restart grace-period Specifies the time duration, in seconds, that the router’s neighbors continue to advertise the router as fully adjacent regardless of the synchronization state during a graceful restart. NOTE: This command enables OSPFv2 graceful restart globally by setting the grace period (in seconds) that an OSPFv2 router’s neighbors continues to advertise the router as adjacent during a graceful restart.
graceful-restart helper-reject Specify the OSPF router to not act as a helper during graceful restart. S6000–ON Syntax graceful-restart helper-reject ip-address To return to default value, use the no graceful-restart helper-reject command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the OSPF router-id, in IP address format, of the restart router that will not act as a helper during graceful restart. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters Defaults planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in a planned restart condition only. unplanned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords unplanned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in an unplanned restart condition only. Support for both planned and unplanned failures. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ip ospf authentication-key Enable authentication and set an authentication key on OSPF traffic on an interface.
Usage Information Version Description pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. All neighboring routers in the same network must use the same password to exchange OSPF information. ip ospf cost Change the cost associated with the OSPF traffic on an interface. S6000–ON Syntax ip ospf cost cost To return to default value, use the no ip ospf cost command. Parameters Defaults cost Enter a number as the cost. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default cost is based on the reference bandwidth.
ip ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the interval elapses, the neighboring routers declare the router dead. S6000–ON Syntax ip ospf dead-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip ospf dead-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds for the interval. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 40 seconds.
ip ospf hello-interval Specify the time interval between the hello packets sent on the interface. S6000–ON Syntax ip ospf hello-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no ip ospf hello-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds for the interval. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 10 seconds. 10 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
To delete a key, use the no ip ospf message-digest-key keyid command. Parameters Defaults keyid Enter a number as the key ID. The range is from 1 to 255. key Enter a continuous character string as the password. No MD5 authentication is configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
ip ospf mtu-ignore Disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection upon receipt of database description (DBD) packets. S6000–ON Syntax ip ospf mtu-ignore To return to the default, use the no ip ospf mtu-ignore command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Set the time interval to a number large enough to prevent unnecessary retransmissions. ip ospf transmit-delay To send a link state update packet on the interface, set the estimated time elapsed.
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. log-adjacency-changes To send a Syslog message about changes in the OSPF adjacency state, set Dell EMC Networking OS. S6000–ON Syntax log-adjacency-changes To disable the Syslog messages, use the no log-adjacency-changes command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History 1042 This guide is platform-specific.
maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. S6000–ON Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters Defaults number Specify the number of paths. The range for OSPFv2 is from 1 to 64. The default for OSPFv2 is 4 paths. The range for OSPFv3 is from 1 to 64. The default for OSPFv3 is 8 paths.
To mib-binding on this OSPF process, use the no mib-binding command. Defaults none. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
No ● ● ● passive-interface default Clear everything and revert to the default behavior. All previously marked passive interfaces are removed. May update ABR status. On configuring suppression using the passive-interface command, the state of the OSPF neighbor does not change to INIT; instead, the state of the OSPF neighbor changes to DOWN after the dead-timer expires. redistribute Redistribute information from another routing protocol throughout the OSPF process.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.3 Added Route Map for BGP Redistribution to OSPF. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address format for each router. However, each router ID must be unique.
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3 on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.9.1.0 Added support for VRF. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# show config ! router ospf 3 passive-interface 0 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# show ip ospf Display information on the OSPF process configured on the switch.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output does not list Area 0. The following describes the show ip ospf command shown in the following example. Line Beginning with Description “Routing Process...” Displays the OSPF process ID and the IP address associated with the process ID. “Supports only...
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to view LSA information on OSPF processes corresponding to that VRF. databasesummary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords database-summary to the display the number of LSA types in each area and the total number of LSAs. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
13.1.1.1 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000097 0x1035 192.68.135.2 192.68.135.2 1419 0x80000294 0x9cbd Link ID 10.2.3.2 10.2.4.2 Link ID 0.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 10.1.1.0 10.1.2.0 10.2.2.0 10.2.3.0 10.2.4.0 11.1.1.0 11.1.2.0 12.1.2.0 13.1.1.0 13.1.2.0 172.16.1.0 DellEMC> Related Commands 2 1 Network (Area 0.0.0.0) ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000003 0x6592 192.68.135.2 908 0x80000055 0x683e Type-5 AS External ADV Router Age Seq# 192.68.135.2 908 0x80000052 192.68.135.2 908 0x8000002a 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 11.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Checksum: 0x8221 Length: 28 Network Mask: /0 TOS: 0 Metric: 2 LS age: 473 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Asbr Link State ID: 104.1.50.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000010 Checksum: 0x4198 Length: 28 --More-Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database external Display information on the AS external (type 5) LSAs.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database external command shown in the following example.
LS type: Type-5 AS External Link State ID: 12.12.12.2 Advertising Router: 20.31.3.1 LS Seq Number: 0x80000007 Checksum: 0x4cde Length: 36 Network Mask: /32 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 25 Forward Address: 0.0.0.0 External Route Tag: 43 LS age: 1868 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC) LS type: Type-5 AS External Link State ID: 24.216.12.0 Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8 LS Seq Number: 0x80000005 Checksum: 0xa00e Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 1 Forward Address: 0.0.0.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8 LS Seq Number: 0x80000006 Checksum: 0xa35 Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Attached Router: 20.20.20.8 Attached Router: 20.20.20.9 Attached Router: 20.20.20.7 Network (Area 0.0.0.1) LS age: 252 Options: (TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Network Link State ID: 192.10.10.2 Advertising Router: 192.10.10.2 LS Seq Number: 0x80000007 Checksum: 0x4309 Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Attached Router: 192.10.10.2 Attached Router: 20.20.20.1 Attached Router: 20.20.20.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
Checksum: 0x376 Length: 28 Opaque Type: 1 Opaque ID: 1 Unable to display opaque data LS age: 833 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area Link State ID: 1.0.0.2 Advertising Router: 10.16.1.160 LS Seq Number: 0x80000002 Checksum: 0x19c2 --More-Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-as Display the opaque-as (type 11) LSA information.
Related Commands Version Description 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-link Display the opaque-link (type 9) LSA information.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database router Display the router (type 1) LSA information.
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database router command shown in the following example. Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router.
Length: 144 AS Boundary Router Area Border Router Number of Links: 10 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.129.1 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.129.1 Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.130.1 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.130.1 Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.142.
● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Example Item Description Metric Displays the LSA metrics. DellEMC# show ip ospf 100 database summary OSPF Router with ID (1.1.1.10) (Process ID 100) Summary Network (Area 0.0.0.0) LS age: 1551 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC, E) LS type: Summary Network Link State ID: 192.68.16.0 Advertising Router: 192.168.17.1 LS Seq Number: 0x80000054 Checksum: 0xb5a2 Length: 28 Network Mask: /24 TOS: 0 Metric: 1 LS age: 9 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Network Link State ID: 192.68.32.
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
Item Description Backup Designated... This line displays the ID of the Backup Designated Router and its interface address. Timer intervals... This line displays the interface’s timer settings for Hello interval, Dead interval, Transmit Delay (Wait), and Retransmit Interval. Example Hello due... This line displays the amount time until the next Hello packet is sent out this interface. Neighbor Count... This line displays the number of neighbors and adjacent neighbors.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000.. 8.3.19.
Parameters Defaults process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to show the OSPF RIB information corresponding to the OSPF processes that are tied to a specific VRF. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
1.1.1.1 3.3.3.3 13.0.0.0 150.150.150.0 172.30.1.0 DellEMC# 1 2 1 2 2 0.0.0.0 13.0.0.3 0.0.0.0 13.0.0.3 13.0.0.3 Lo Te Te Te Te 0 1/4/1 1/4/1 1/4/1 1/4/1 0 1 0 1 Intra-Area Intra-Area Intra-Area External Intra-Area show ip ospf statistics Display OSPF statistics. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf-name] statistics global | [interface name {neighbor router-id}] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf statistics process-id global command shown in the following example.
Example Error Type Description Version Version mismatch AreaMismatch Area mismatch Conf-Issue The received hello packet has a different hello or dead interval than the configuration. No-Buffer Buffer allocation failure. Seq-no A sequence no errors occurred during the database exchange process. Socket Socket Read/Write operation error. Q-overflow Packets dropped due to queue overflow. Unknown-Pkt Received packet is not an OSPF packet.
Hello DDiscr LSReq LSUpd LSAck RX 5 2 1 3 2 TX 6 5 1 3 3 Timers Hello 0 Wait 0 Grace 0 Dead 39 Transmit 4 Queue Statistics LSU-Q-Len 0 LSU-Q-Wmark 1 LSR-Q-Len 0 LSR-Q-Wmark 1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/6/1)# Related Commands ● clear ip ospf statistics — clear the packet statistics in all interfaces and neighbors. show ip ospf timers rate-limit Show the LSA currently in the queue waiting for timers to expire.
LSA id: 3.3.3.3 Type: 1 Adv Rtid: 3.3.3.3 Expiry time: 00:00:23.96 DellEMC# show ip ospf topology Display routers in directly connected areas. Syntax Parameters Defaults show ip ospf [process-id] topology process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
summary-address To advertise one external route, set the OSPF ASBR. Syntax summary-address ip-address mask [not-advertise] [tag tag-value] To disable summary address, use the no summary-address ip-address mask command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Specify the IP address in dotted decimal format of the address to summarize. mask Specify the mask in dotted decimal format of the address to summarize.
timers spf Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation. S6000–ON Syntax timers spf delay holdtime msec To return to the default, use the no timers spf command. Parameters Defaults delay Enter a number as the delay. The range is from 0 to 2147483647. The default is 5 seconds. holdtime Enter a number as the hold time. The range is from 0 to 2147483647. The default is 10 seconds.
Example DellEMC# conf DellEMC(conf)# router ospf 1 DellEMC(conf-router_ospf-1)# timer spf 2 5 msec DellEMC(conf-router_ospf-1)# show config ! router ospf 1 timers spf 2 5 msec DellEMC(conf-router_ospf-1)# end timers throttle lsa all Configure LSA transmit intervals. Syntax timers throttle lsa all {start-interval | hold-interval | max-interval} To return to the default, use the no timers throttle lsa command.
Usage Information LSAs are sent after the start-interval and then after hold-interval until the maximum interval is reached. In throttling, exponential backoff is used when sending same LSA, so that the interval is multiplied until the maximum time is reached. For example, if the start-interval 5000 and hold-interval 1000 and max-interval 100,000, the LSA is sent at 5000 msec, then 1000 msec, then 2000 msec, them 4000 until 100,000 msec is reached.
area authentication Configure an IPsec authentication policy for OSPFv3 packets in an OFSPFv3 area. Syntax area area-id authentication ipsec spi number {MD5 | SHA1} [key-encryptiontype] key Parameters area area-id Area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be authenticated. For area-id, you can enter a number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295.
The configuration of IPsec authentication on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area authentication policy that has been configured is applied to the interface. To remove an IPsec authentication policy from an OSPFv3 area, enter the no area area-id authentication spi number command. Related Commands ● ipv6 ospf authentication – configure an IPsec authentication policy on an OSPFv3 interface.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the remaining DNOS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
Version Description 9.9(0.
debug ipv6 ospf bfd Display debug information and interface types for bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on OSPF IPv6 packets. Syntax Parameters [no] debug ipv6 ospf bfd [interface] [vrf vrf-name] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
00:59:27 : OSPFv3INFO: Enabling BFD for NBRIP fe80:0000:0000:0000:0201:e8ff:fe8b:7720 00:59:27 : OSPFv3INFO: Completed Enabling BFD on interface Te 1/2/1 00:59:27 : OSPFv3INFO: Completed Interface mode BFD configuration on Te 1/2/1!! 00:59:27 : OSPFv3INFO: Enabling BFD for NBRIP fe80:0000:0000:0000:0201:e8ff:fe8b:7720 00:59:27 : OSPFv3INFO: Ospf3_register_bfd ospf key 27648 00:59:27 : OSPFv3INFO: OSPFV3 Enabling BFD for NBRIP fe80:0000:0000:0000:0201:e8ff:fe8b:7720 Interface Te 1/2/1 IfIndex 34145282 00:59:
Example Example (detail) Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series. DellEMC# debug ipv6 ospf packet OSPFv3 packet related debugging is on for all interfaces 05:21:01 : OSPFv3: Sending, Ver:3, Type:1(Hello), Len:40, Router ID:223.255.255.
debug ipv6 ospf packet Display debug information and interface types on OSPF IPv6 packets. Syntax debug ipv6 ospf packet [interface] [vrf vrf-name] [detail] Parameters interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
Example (detail) DellEMC# debug ipv6 ospf packet te 0/7 detail 00:37:52 : OSPFv3: Rcv,V:3 Type:4(LSUpd) RId:10,130.254.101 Area:0 Inst:0 Len:96 Cksum:0x6779 #LSA:2 -LSA:ASExt Age:3600 LSId:0.0.0.1 RId:10.130.254.101 Seq:0x80000001 Met:20(E2) Opt:0x10(DN ) Prefix:9001::/64 -LSA:Router Age:1 LSId:0.0.0.0 RId:10.130.254.101 Seq:0x80000003 Flags:0x2(E) Opt:0x13(R E V6) #Links:1 -Type:TRNET Met:1 IntfId:1049476 NbrIntfId:1049476 NbrRId:10.160.3.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced the command. The following section describes the command fields. Lines Beginning With or Including Description OSPFv3... Debugging is on for all OSPFv3 packets and all interfaces. 05:21:01 Displays the time stamp. Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version..
metric-type type-value route-map map- name Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords metric-type then an OSPFv3 link state type of 1 or 2 for default routes. The values are: ● 1 = Type 1 external route ● 2 = Type 2 external route (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.2 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.2 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. OSPFv3 graceful restart supports planned-only and/or unplanned-only restarts. The default is support for both planned and unplanned restarts.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series and C-Series. ipv6 ospf authentication Configure an IPsec authentication policy for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6 interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf authentication {null | ipsec spi number {MD5 | SHA1} [keyencryption-type] key}} Parameters null Causes an authentication policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface.
An SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link. To remove an IPsec authentication policy from an interface, enter the no ipv6 ospf authentication spi number command. To remove null authentication on an interface to allow the interface to inherit the authentication policy configured for the OSPFv3 area, enter the no ipv6 ospf authentication null command.
ipv6 ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the time interval elapses, the neighboring routers declare the router down. Syntax ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds To return to the default time interval, use the no ipv6 ospf dead-interval command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the time interval in seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. 40 seconds (Ethernet). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported. key-encryptiontype key (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). Text string used in authentication. The required lengths of a non-encrypted or encrypted key are: 3DES - 48 or 96 hex digits; DES - 16 or 32 hex digits; AES-CBC -32 or 64 hex digits for AES-128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES-192.
ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject Configure an OSPFv3 interface to not act upon the Grace LSAs that it receives from a restarting OSPFv3 neighbor. Syntax ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject To disable the helper-reject role, enter no ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject. Defaults The helper-reject role is not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a Designated Router or Backup Designated Router. Use this command for interfaces connected to multi-access networks, not point-to-point networks. ipv6 router ospf Enable OSPF for IPv6 router configuration.
maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters Defaults number Specify the number of paths. The range is from 1 to 64. The default is 8 paths. 8 Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Range: 5 to 86400 seconds. on-startup waitfor-bgp [ waittime ] Defaults Enable the router to announce the maximum metric in OSPF LSAs until the BGP routing table converges with updated routes. Default: 600 seconds. You can also specify the time (in seconds) that the router waits for the BGP routing table to converge before it stops advertising the maximum cost in LSAs and advertises the router’s currently configured OSPF cost. Range: 5 to 86400 seconds. Not Configured.
Area ranges are Area 1 Number of interface in this area is 1 SPF algorithm executed 3 times Area ranges are DellEMC(conf)#show ip ospf database router Exception Flag: Announcing maximum link costs LS age: 198 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC) LS Type: Router Links Link State ID: 2.1.1.1 Advertising Router: 2.1.1.1 LS Seq Number: 80000005 Checksum: 0x9F5D Length: 48 Number of Links: 2 passive-interface Disable (suppress) sending routing updates on an interface.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. By default, no interfaces are passive. Routing updates are sent to all interfaces on which the routing protocol is enabled. If you disable the sending of routing updates on an interface, the particular address prefix continues to be advertised to other interfaces, and updates from other routers on that interface continue to be received and processed.
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF for OSPFv2 ROUTER OSPFv3 for OSPFv3 Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced support for OSPFv3 on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address for each router. However, each router ID must be unique.
Example DellEMC# show crypto ipsec policy Crypto IPSec client security policy data Policy name : OSPFv3-1-502 Policy refcount : 1 Inbound ESP SPI : 502 (0x1F6) Outbound ESP SPI : 502 (0x1F6) Inbound ESP Auth Key : 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 Outbound ESP Auth Key : 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 Inbound ESP Cipher Key : 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 Outbound ESP Cipher Key : 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 Transform set : esp-3des esp-md5-hmac Crypto IPSec client
show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Display the IPsec security associations (SAs) used on OSPFv3 interfaces. Syntax show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 [interface interface] Parameters interface interface (OPTIONAL) Displays information about the SAs used on a specified OSPFv3 interface, where interface is one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound ah sas spi : 500 (0x1f4) transform : ah-md5-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE inbound esp sas outbound esp sas Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1 Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d11 IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-600 inbound ah sas outbound ah sas inbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection supp
show ipv6 ospf database Display information in the OSPFv3 database, including link-state advertisements (LSAs) in detail. Syntax show ipv6 ospf [process-number] [vrf vrf-name] database [database-summary | grace-lsa | external | inter-area-prefix | inter-area-router | intra-areaprefix | link | network | router | nssa-external] Parameters process-number Enter the OSPF process number.
Usage Information Example (gracelsa) Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3 on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.2 Added support for the display of graceful restart parameters and Type-11 Grace LSAs on E-Series routers. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for C-Series.
Rtr LSA Count 1 Net LSA Count 0 Inter Area Pfx LSA Count 5 Inter Area Rtr LSA Count 0 Group Mem LSA Count 0 Type-7 LSA count 0 Intra Area Pfx LSA Count 2 Intra Area TE LSA Count 2 E1200-T2C2#sh ipv6 ospf neighbor Neighbor ID Interface 63.114.8.36 Example (external) Pri 1 State FULL/DR Dead Time 00:00:37 Interface ID 4 Te 1/4/1 DellEMC# show ipv6 ospf database external OSPFv3 Router with ID (10.160.3.
interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
show ipv6 ospf neighbor Display the OSPF neighbor information on a per-interface basis. Syntax show ipv6 ospf [process-number] [vrf vrf-name] neighbor [interface] Parameters process-number Enter the OSPF process number. vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display OSPF neighbors corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: If you do not specify this option, neighbors corresponding to the default VRF are displayed.
snmp context Configure SNMPv3 context name to map multiple OSPFv3 VRF instances. Syntax snmp context {context-name} To clear snmp context, use the no snmp context {context-name} command. Parameters Defaults context-name Enter the SNMP context name. The maximum length is 32 alphanumeric characters. None. Command Modes IPv6 ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 for OSPFv3 and ROUTER OSPFv2 for OSPFv2 Command History Usage Information Example 1122 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced the keyword msec. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
38 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable PBR, create a redirect list and apply it to the interface. After the redirect list is applied to the interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list. PBR is supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS.
Related Commands Version Description 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ip redirect-list – enable an IP Redirect List. ip redirect-group Apply a redirect list (policy-based routing) on an interface. You can apply multiple redirect lists to an interface by entering this command multiple times. Syntax ip redirect-group redirect-list-name test [l2–switch] To remove a redirect list from an interface, use the no ip redirect-group name command.
NOTE: Apply the redirect list to physical, VLAN, or LAG interfaces only. The Layer2 PBR option matches the layer2 traffic flow. If you un-configure this option, then the Layer2 traffic is not matched. You can apply the l2–switch option to redirect Layer2 traffic only on a VLAN interface. This VLAN interface must be configured with an IP address for ARP resolution. NOTE: The l2–switch option that redirects Layer2 traffic is applicable only on VLAN interfaces.
permit Configure a permit rule. A permit rule excludes the matching packets from PBR classification and routes them using conventional routing. Syntax permit {ip-protocol-number | protocol-type} {source mask | any | host ipaddress} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operators] To remove the rule, use one of the following: ● If you know the filter sequence number, use the no seq sequence-number syntax command.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
● rst = reset the connection ● syn = synchronize sequence number ● urg = urgent field Defaults source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
[bit] [operator]{source-port source-port| source-port-range start-port end-port} {destination-port destination-port| destination-port-range startport - end-port} To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command. Parameters sequencenumber Enter a number from 1 to 65535. permit Enter the keyword permit assign the sequence to the permit list. redirect Enter the keyword redirect to assign the sequence to the redirect list. ip-address Enter the keyword IP address of the forwarding router.
destination-port- Enter the keywords destination-port-range then the range of the start port range to end port to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule. Defaults none Command Modes REDIRECT-LIST Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. The show cam pbr command displays the PBR CAM content.
seq 45 redirect 31.1.1.2 track 200 ip 12.0.0.0 255.0.0.197 13.0.0.0 255.0.0.
39 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) The protocol-independent multicast (PIM) commands are supported by the Dell EMC Networking operating software on the platform. The following describes the IPv4 PIM-SIM commands. Topics: • • IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv4 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. This command re-applies the RP mapping logic for all the groups learnt by the node. Any stale information corresponding to the existing mapping configuration is updated. The existing BSR cache and the *,G's are deleted only if these entries are stale. clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database.
If you use this command on a peer VLT node, only the synced routes are deleted from the multicast route table. debug ip pim View IP PIM debugging messages. Syntax debug ip pim [vrf vrf-name] [bsr | events | group | packet [in | out] | register | state | timer [assert | hello | joinprune | register]] To disable PIM debugging, use the no debug ip pim [vrf vrf-name] command or use the undebug all to disable all debugging command.
Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. ip pim bsr-border Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface. Syntax ip pim bsr-border To return to the default value, use the no ip pim bsr-border command. Defaults Disabled.
ip pim bsr-candidate To join the Bootstrap election process, configure the PIM router. Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority] To return to the default value, use the no ip pim bsr-candidate [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure the PIM router on a VRF.
ip pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the interface. Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command. Parameters Defaults priority-value Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1. 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Removed the in and out parameters. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series for the port-channels and the S-Series. ip pim register-filter To prevent a PIM source DR from sending register packets to an RP for the specified multicast source and group, use this feature.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced The access name is an extended IP access list that denies PIM register packets to RP at the source DR based on the multicast and group addresses. Do not enter this command before creating the access-list. ip pim rp-address Configure a static PIM rendezvous point (RP) address for a group or access-list.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. First-hop routers use this address by to send register packets on behalf of source multicast hosts. The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered. The RP is chosen based on a longer prefix match for a group. The RP selection does not depend on dynamic or static RP assignments.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Priority is stored at BSR router when receiving a Candidate-RP-Advertisement. ip pim sparse-mode Enable PIM sparse mode and IGMP on the interface. Syntax ip pim sparse-mode To disable PIM sparse mode and IGMP, use the no ip pim sparse-mode command. Defaults Disabled.
ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources. Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds [access-listname] To disable configured timers and return to default mode, use the no ip pim [vrf vrf-name] sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable expiry timer for all sources on that VRF.
ip pim ssm-range Specify the SSM group range using an access list. Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] ssm-range {access_list_name} Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to specify the SSM group range for that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. access_list_name Enter the name of the access list.
When you configure the SSM range, Dell EMC Networking OS supports SSM for configured group range as well as the default SSM range. When you remove the SSM ACL, PIM SSM is supported for the default SSM range only. ip pim spt-threshold To switch to the shortest path tree when the traffic reaches the specified threshold value, configure the PIM router.
show ip pim bsr-router View information on the Bootstrap router. S6000–ON Syntax show ip pim [vrf vrf-name] bsr-router Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
show ip pim interface View information on the interfaces with IP PIM enabled. S6000–ON Syntax Parameters show ip pim [vrf vrf-name] interface vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on this VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Field Description DR Displays the IP address of the Designated Router for that interface. The show ip pim interface command does not display information corresponding to the loop-back interfaces. Example DellEMC# show ip pim interface Address Interface Ver/ Mode 165.87.34.5 Te 1/10/1 v2/S 10.1.1.2 Vl 10 v2/S 20.1.1.5 Vl 20 v2/S 165.87.31.200 Vl 30 v2/S DellEMC# Nbr Count 0 1 1 1 Query Intvl 30 30 30 30 DR Prio 1 1 1 1 DR 165.87.34.5 10.1.1.2 20.1.1.5 165.87.31.
Usage Information The following describes the show ip pim neighbor command shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the PIM neighbor. Example Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or Port Channel), on which the PIM neighbor was found.
Example Example (Mapping) Example (Address) Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. DellEMC# show ip pim rp Group RP 224.2.197.115 165.87.20.4 224.2.217.146 165.87.20.
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. Added support for VRF on S6000, S4810, S4820T, Z9000, Z9500, and S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000.
Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.1 Support for the display of PIM-SM snooping status was added on E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
show ip pim tib View the PIM tree information base (TIB). S6000–ON Syntax Parameters show ip pim [vrf vrf-name] tib [group-address [source-address]] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Field Description ● ● ● ● ● ● ● C = directly connected L = local to the multicast group P = route was pruned R = the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP F = Dell EMC Networking OS is registering this entry for a multicast source T = packets were received via Shortest Tree Path J = first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is ready to switch to SPT ● K = acknowledge pending state Example Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) interface towards the RP/
clear ipv6 pim tib Clear the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information base—TIB). Syntax Parameters clear ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] tib [group-address] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010. ipv6 pim bsr-border Define the border of IPv6 PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface. Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-border To return to the default value, use the no ipv6 pim bsr-border command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a number as the number of seconds between router query messages. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 30 seconds. 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.11.3.
ipv6 pim rp-candidate Configure an IPv6 PIM router to send out a Candidate-RP-Advertisement message to the bootstrap (BS) router or define group prefixes that are defined with the RP address to PIM BSR. Syntax ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-candidate {interface [priority] [acl-name]} To return to the default value, use the no ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-candidate {interface [priority]} command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF.
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010. Enable the interface (use the no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command configured. Also enable Multicast globally. PIM is supported on the port-channel interface. ipv6 pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010.
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010.
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IP PIM debugging messages corresponding to that VRF. mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learned. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format to view RP mappings for a specific group. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
RP: 100::1, v2 DellEMC# show ipv6 pim summary View information about PIM-SM operation. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] summary vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
show ipv6 pim tib View the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information base — tib). Syntax show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] tib [group-address [source-address]] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IP PIM debugging messages corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv6 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands. clear ipv6 pim tib Clear the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information base—TIB). Syntax Parameters clear ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] tib [group-address] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
● hello: to view the IPv6 PIM neighbor keepalive timer ● joinprune: to view the expiry timer (join/prune timer) ● register: to view the register suppression timer Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010. ipv6 pim bsr-border Define the border of IPv6 PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface.
takes the precedence. If the priority values are equal, the router with the higher IP address becomes the BSR. The default is 0. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3048-ON, S3100 Series, S4048-ON, S4048T-ON, S6000-ON, S6010-ON, S6100-ON, Z9100-ON.
Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010. ipv6 pim rp-address Configure a static PIM rendezvous point (RP) address for a group. First-hop routers use this address to send register packets on behalf of the source multicast host.
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
ipv6 pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources. Syntax ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds To disable configured timers and return to default mode, use the no ipv6 pim sparse-mode sgexpiry-timer command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable expiry timer for all sources on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
Usage Information PIM leaf routers join the shortest path tree immediately after the first packet arrives from a new source. show ipv6 pim interface Display IPv6 PIM enabled interfaces. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] interface vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IP PIM debugging messages corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
Example Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010. DellEMC#show ipv6 pim neighbor Neighbor Interface Address fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:140f Fo 1/10/1 fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Fo 1/12/1 DellEMC# Uptime/Expires Ver 01:44:59/00:01:16 01:45:00/00:01:16 v2 v2 DR Prio/Mode 1 / S 1 / DR show ipv6 pim rp View all IPv6 multicast groups-to-rendezvous point (RP) mappings.
Example (Mapping) DellEMC#show ipv6 pim rp mapping PIM Group-to-RP Mappings Group(s): ff0e::225:1:1:1/128 RP: 100::1, v2 Info source: 200::1, via bootstrap, expires: 00:01:50 RP: 150::1, v2 Info source: 200::1, via bootstrap, expires: 00:01:50 RP: 200::1, v2 Info source: 200::1, via bootstrap, expires: 00:01:57 Group(s): ff0e::225:1:1:2/128 RP: 100::1, v2 Info source: 200::1, via bootstrap, expires: 00:01:50 RP: 150::1, v2 Info source: 200::1, via bootstrap, expires: 00:01:50 RP: 200::1, v2 Info source: 20
24/0 (S,G,Rpt) entries in PIM-TIB/MFC 8 PIM nexthops 1 RPs 7 sources 30 Register states Message summary: 47132/53793 Joins/Prunes sent/received 0/0 Candidate-RP advertisements sent/received 0/0 BSR messages sent/received 0/0 MSDP updates sent/received 243746/0 Null Register messages sent/received 0/973809 Register-stop messages sent/received Data path event summary: 222 no-cache messages received 281 last-hop switchover messages received 26260/2958 pim-assert messages sent/received 0/0 register messages sen
RPF neighbor: fortyGigE 1/3/1, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interface list: fortyGigE 1/1/1 (25::1, ff0e::225:1:2:2), uptime 00:09:54, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbor: fortyGigE 1/3/1, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interface list: fortyGigE 1/1/1 (25::2, ff0e::225:1:2:2), uptime 00:09:54, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbor: fortyGigE 1/3/1, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interface list: fortyGigE 1/1/1 (25::1, ff0e::226:1:2:1), uptime 00:09:54, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbo
40 Port Monitoring The port monitoring feature allows you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port. Important Points to Remember ● Port monitoring is supported on physical ports and logical interfaces, such as port channels and virtual local area networks (VLANs). ● The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same switch.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
monitor multicast-queue Configure monitor QoS multicast queue ID. Syntax monitor multicast-queue queue-id To remove the configuration, use the no monitor multicast-queue command. Parameters Defaults queue-id Enter the QoS multicast queue ID. The range is from 0 to 9. queue-id: 0 Enable status: Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Example Command History DellEMC(conf)#monitor multicast-queue 7 This guide is platform-specific.
Defaults set ip dscp Configures the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value of the packets in the Encapsulated Remote Switched Port Analyzer (ERSPAN) traffic. To revert to the default value, use the no form of this command. dscp_value DSCP value of the packets in the ERSPAN traffic. The range is from 0 to 63. The default value is 0. set ip ttl Configures the IP time-to-live (TTL) value of the Encapsulated Remote Switched Port Analyzer (ERSPAN) traffic.
rate-limit Configure the rate-limit to limit the mirrored packets. Syntax rate-limit limit To remove the limit, use the no rate-limit limit command. Parameters Defaults limit Enter the rate-limit value. The range is from 0 to 40000 Megabits per second. 60 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.0.0 Added support for the RPM / ERPM. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a VLAN interface enter the keyword VLAN followed by a number from 1 to 4094. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. range Enter the keyword range to specify the list of interfaces. any Enter the keyword any to specify all interfaces.
Example Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
41 Private VLAN (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature of the Dell EMC Networking OS is supported on the platforms. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. The Dell EMC Networking OS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069. For more information, see the following commands.
ip local-proxy-arp Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN. S6000–ON Syntax [no] ip local-proxy-arp To disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN, use the no ip localproxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the primary VLAN. To disable Layer 3 communication in a particular secondary VLAN, use the no ip local-proxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the selected secondary VLAN.
private-vlan mode Set PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. S6000–ON Syntax [no] private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} To remove the PVLAN configuration, use the no private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} command syntax. Parameters Defaults community Enter the keyword community to set the VLAN as a community VLAN. isolated Enter the keyword isolated to configure the VLAN as an isolated VLAN.
private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. Syntax [no] private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list To remove specific secondary VLANs from the configuration, use the no private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list command syntax. Parameters Defaults vlan-list Enter the list of secondary VLANs to associate with the selected primary VLAN. The list can be in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format, following the convention for the range input.
To remove PVLAN mode from the selected port, use the no switchport mode private-vlan command. Parameters Defaults host Enter the keyword host to configure the selected port or port channel as an isolated interface in a PVLAN. promiscuous Enter the keyword promiscuous to configure the selected port or port channel as an promiscuous interface. trunk Enter the keyword trunk to configure the selected port or port channel as a trunk port in a PVLAN. Disabled.
42 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning tree protocol. Dell EMC Networking OS supports PVST+ on the S6000–ON platform. NOTE: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. pre- 7.7.1.1 Introduced. ● protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable PVST+ globally. S6000–ON Syntax disable To enable PVST+, use the no disable command.
Related Commands ● protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter PVST+ mode. extend system-id To augment the Bridge ID with a VLAN ID so that PVST+ differentiate between BPDUs for each VLAN, use extend system ID. If the VLAN receives a BPDU meant for another VLAN, PVST+ does not detect a loop, and both ports can remain in Forwarding state. S6000–ON Syntax extend system-id Defaults Disabled Command Modes PROTOCOL PVST Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
-------------------------------------------------------Te 1/10/1 Desg 128.140 128 200000 FWD 0 P2P No Te 1/12/1 Dis 128.142 128 200000 DIS 0 P2P No DellEMC(conf-pvst)# Related Commands ● protocol spanning-tree pvst – enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. protocol spanning-tree pvst To enable PVST+ on a device, enter the PVST+ mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree pvst To disable PVST+, use the disable command.
Usage Information After you enable PVST+, the device runs an STP instance for each VLAN it supports. Related Commands ● disable — disables PVST+. ● show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration. show spanning-tree pvst View the Per-VLAN spanning tree configuration. S6000–ON Syntax Parameters Defaults show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] [brief] [guard] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094.
Usage Information Example (Brief) Version Description 8.4.2.1 Support for the optional guard keyword was added on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display port error disable state (EDS) caused by loopback BPDU inconsistency and Port VLAN ID inconsistency. 6.2.1.1 Introduced. The following describes the show spanning-tree pvst command shown in the following examples.
Port 131 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.131 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06 Designated port id is 128.
Related Commands ● spanning-tree pvst — configure PVST+ on an interface. spanning-tree pvst Configure a PVST+ interface with one of these settings: edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port disablement if an error condition occurs, port priority or cost for a VLAN range, loop guard, or root guard.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.
no ip address switchport spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 cost 18000 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# end DellEMC# Related Commands ● show spanning-tree pvst — views the PVST+ configuration. spanning-tree pvst err-disable Place ports in an Err-Disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members an untagged VLAN.
tc-flush-standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification. S6000–ON Syntax tc-flush-standard To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
bridge-priority value Defaults Enter the keywords bridge-priority then the bridge priority value in increments of 4096. The range is from 0 to 61440. The default is 32768. 32768 Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
43 Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell EMC Networking OS commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell EMC Networking products. Topics: • • • • Global Configuration Commands Per-Port QoS Commands Policy-Based QoS Commands DSCP Color Map Commands Global Configuration Commands There is only one global configuration QoS command.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced. By default, when rate policing and shaping, the system does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields. These fields are overhead; only the fields from MAC destination address to the CRC are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations. service-class bandwidth-percentage Specify a minimum bandwidth for queues.
service-class dot1p-mapping Configure a service-class criterion based on a dot1p value. S6000–ON Syntax service-class dot1p-mapping {dot1p0 queue | dot1p1 queue | dot1p2 queue | dot1p3 queue | dot1p4 queue| dot1p5 queue | dot1p6 queue | dot1p7 queue} Parameters Defaults queue Enter a value from 0 to 7. For each dot1p Priority, the default CoS queue value is: ● Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ● Queue : 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Usage Information Version Description 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. After you configure a unicast queue as strict-priority, that particular queue, on the entire chassis, is treated as a strict-priority unicast. Traffic for a strict priority is scheduled before any other queues are serviced. For example, if you send 100% line rate traffic over the SP queue, it starves all other queues on the ports on which this traffic is flowing.
When you set the priority for a port channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the port channel are configured with the same value. You cannot assign the dot1p-priority command to individual interfaces in a port channel. rate police Police the incoming traffic rate on the selected interface. Syntax Parameters Defaults rate police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burstKB]] [vlan vlan-id] kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps).
S-Series On one interface, you can configure the rate police command for a VLAN or you can configure the rate police command for an interface. For each physical interface, you can configure three rate police commands specifying different VLANS. rate-shape Shape the traffic output on the selected interface. Syntax rate shape [kbps] rate [burst-KB] Parameters Defaults kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Enter the value in multiples of 64.
Related Commands ● rate-shape — shapes traffic output as part of the designated policy. service-class dynamic dot1p Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode). A CONFIGURATION mode entry supersedes an INTERFACE mode entry. S6000–ON Syntax service-class dynamic dot1p To return to the default setting, use the no service-class dynamic dot1p command.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Expanded the command to permit configuration on port channels. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To honor all incoming 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on the interface, enter this command. By default, this facility is not enabled (that is, the 802.1p markings on incoming traffic are not honored).
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.1.9.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information The unit of bandwidth percentage is 1%. If the sum of the bandwidth percentages given to all eight classes exceeds 100%, the bandwidth percentage automatically scales down to 100%. Related Commands ● qos-policy-output — creates a QoS output policy.
class-map Create/access a class map. Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality-of-service policies to each class. Syntax class-map {match-all | match-any} class-map-name [cpu-qos] [layer2] Parameters Defaults match-all Determines how packets are evaluated when multiple match criteria exist. Enter the keywords match-all to determine that the packets must meet all the match criteria in order to be a member of the class.
Related Commands ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ip access-list extended — configures an extended IP ACL. ip access-list standard — configures a standard IP ACL. match ip access-group — configures the match criteria based on the access control list (ACL). match ip precedence — identifies the IP precedence values as match criteria. match ip dscp — configures the match criteria based on the DSCP value. match mac access-group — configures a match criterion for a class map based on the contents of the designated MAC ACL.
Related Commands Version Description 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show qos statistics — displays the QoS statistics. description Add a description to the selected policy map or QoS policy. S6000–ON Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the policies (80 characters maximum).
match ip access-group Configure match criteria for a class map, based on the access control list (ACL). NOTE: IPv6 class-maps and IP-any class-maps do not match. This condition is true for IPv6 and IP-any class-maps on both ACLs as well as VLANs.
Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. For class-map match-any, a maximum of five ACL match criteria are allowed. For class-map match-all, only one ACL match criteria is allowed. Related Commands ● class-map — identifies the class map. match ip dscp Use a differentiated services code point (DSCP) value as a match criteria.
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Added the keyword multicast ; added the DSCP Marking option support on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series; added support for the DSCP Marking option. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. The match ip dscp and match ip precedence commands are mutually exclusive.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Added support for the ipv6 and ip-any options on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Available on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added support for the DSCP Marking option. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. You can match against only one VLAN ID. Related Commands ● class-map — identifies the class map. policy-aggregate Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps. An aggregate QoS policy is part of the policy map (output) applied on an interface.
Version Description 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information An aggregate output QoS policy applies to all outbound port traffic. An aggregate output QoS policy can coexist with per-queue output QoS policies. If the rate shape exists in both aggregate and per-queue qos-policy, minimum of 2 take effect. Some of all Queue-rate will not exceed aggregate. Related Commands ● policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. ● policy-map-output — creates an output policy map.
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Expanded to add support for Layer 2. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information The input policy map is used to classify incoming traffic to different flows using class-map, QoS policy, or incoming packets DSCP. This command enables Policy-Map-Input Configuration mode (conf-policy-mapin). When you configure an input policy map for CoPP, you must enter the keyword cpu-qos .
Usage Information To assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy, use the Output Policy map. This command enables Policy-Map-Output Configuration mode (conf-policy-map-out). Related Commands ● service-queue — assigns a class map and QoS policy to different queues. ● policy-aggregate — allows an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS using policy maps. ● service-policy output — applies an output policy map to the selected interface. qos-policy-input Create a QoS input policy on the router.
When changing a Service-Queue configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and readded automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched Packets value shown in the show qos statistics command is reset. If you create create a QoS input policy to be used for CoPP, you must enter the keyword cpu-qos . Related Commands ● rate police — incoming traffic policing function. qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy.
rate-police Specify the policing functionality on incoming traffic. Syntax rate-police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peak-rate [burstKB]] Parameters Defaults kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Make the following value a multiple of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps). committed-rate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps. The range is from 0 to 40000.
rate-shape Shape traffic output as part of the designated policy. Syntax Parameters Defaults rate-shape [kbps | pps] peak-rate [burst-kbps | burst-packets] commited [kbps | pps] commited-rate [burst-kbps | burst-packets] pps Enter the keyword pps to specify the rate limit in packets per second (pps). kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Make the following value a multiple of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000.
size. Traffic is considered to be green-colored up to the point at which the unused bandwidth does not exceed the committed burst size. Related Commands ● rate shape — shapes traffic output as part of the designated policy. ● qos-policy-output — creates a QoS output policy. service-policy input Apply an input policy map to the selected interface.
NOTE: The service-policy commands are not allowed on a port channel. The servicepolicy input policy-map-name command and the service-class dynamic dot1p command are not allowed simultaneously on an interface. However, the service-policy input command (without the policy-map-name option) and the service-class dynamic dot1p command are allowed on an interface. Related Commands ● policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. service-policy output Apply an output policy map to the selected interface.
service-queue Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues. S6000–ON Syntax service-queue queue-id [class-map class-map-name] [qos-policy qos-policyname] To remove the queue assignment, use the no service-queue queue-id [class-map classmap-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name] command. Parameters queue-id Enter the value used to identify a queue. The range is from 0 to 7.
set Mark outgoing traffic with a differentiated service code point (DSCP) or dot1p value. S6000–ON Syntax Parameters Defaults set {ip-dscp value | mac-dot1p value} ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ip-dscp then the IP DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. mac-dot1p value Enter the keywords mac-dot1p then the dot1p value. The range is from 0 to 7. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-in) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the seq option on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. detail Defaults To view a policy map interface in detail, enter the keyword detail and optionally one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
Example (IPv6) DellEMC# show qos policy-map detail Tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 Interface TeGigabitEthernet 4/1/1 Policy-map-input pmap1 Queue# Class-map-name Qos-policy-name 0 c0 q0 1 c1 q1 2 c2 q2 3 c3 q3 4 c4 q4 5 c5 6 c6 q6 7 c7 q7 DellEMC# Example (Summary IPv4) DellEMC# show qos policy-map summary Interface policy-map-input policy-map-output Te 4/1/1 PM1 Te 4/2/1 PM2 PMOut DellEMC# show qos policy-map-input View the input QoS policy map details.
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added Trust IPv6 diffserv. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show qos qos-policy-output Qos-policy-output qosOut Rate-limit 50 50 peak 50 50 Wred yellow 1 Wred green 1 DellEMC# show qos statistics View QoS statistics.
Example of show qos statistics egress—queue with per queue per port tx and drop rates Example of show qos statistics wred-profile Usage Information Version Description 9.11(0.0) Updated the show qos statistics egress—queue output to reflect per queue per port tx and drop rates. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
● Queued Pkts — Cumulative packet count in that queue. ● Matched Pkts — The number of packets that matched the class-map criteria. NOTE: When you configure trust , matched packet counters are not incremented in this field. ● Matched Bytes — The number of bytes that matched the class-map criteria. NOTE: When you configure trust , matched byte counters are not incremented in this field. ● Dropped Pkts — The total of the number of packets dropped for green, yellow and out-of-profile.
service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight Create a service class and associate the threshold weight of the shared buffer with each of the queues per port in the egress direction.
Example sharedthresholdweight on the queue % of available shared buffer that can be consumed by the queue 10 80% 11 88.89% DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/8/1)# Service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight queue5 4 queue7 6 test cam-usage Check the Input Policy Map configuration for the CAM usage. S6000–ON Syntax test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map stack-unit {[number port-set portpipe number] | [all]} Parameters policy-map Enter the policy map name.
An input policy map with both Trust and Class-map configuration, the Class-map rules are ignored and only the Trust rule is programmed in the CAM. In such an instance, the Estimated CAM output column contains the size of the CAM space required for the Trust rule and not the Class-map rule. The following describes the test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map stackunit command shown in the following example. Field Description stack-unit Indicates the stack-unit slot number.
threshold Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values for the configured WRED profiles. S6000–ON Syntax threshold min number max number max-drop-drop To remove the threshold values, use the no threshold min number max number command. Parameters min number Enter the keyword min then the minimum threshold number for the WRED profile. The range is from 1 to 9360. max number Enter the keyword max then the maximum threshold number for the WRED profile. The range is from 1 to 9360 KB.
Table 5. Threshold Values for the Pre-defined WRED Profiles (continued) Related Commands Pre-Defined WRED Profile Name Minimum Threshold Maximum Threshold Maximum Drop Rate wred_fortyg_y 594 5941 50 wred_fortyg_g 594 5941 25 ● wred-profile — creates a WRED profile. trust Specify dynamic classification (DSCP) or dot1p to trust. S6000–ON Syntax Parameters Defaults trust {diffserv [fallback]| dot1p [fallback]} diffserv Enter the keyword diffserv to specify trust of DSCP markings.
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 Added dot1p and IPv6 DSCP . 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. When you configure trust, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics command. Dynamic mapping honors packets marked according to the standard definitions of DSCP. The following lists the default mapping. Table 6.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820t. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. When you enable wred ecn, and the number of packets in the queue is below the minimum threshold, packets are transmitted per the usual WRED treatment.
Usage Information Example If the average queue size is more than the maximum threshold of WRED, the packet is dropped. If the average queue size is between the minimum and maximum threshold values, the decision to drop or queue the packet is taken based on the packet drop probability. The probability that a packet is dropped depends on the minimum threshold, maximum threshold, and mark probability denominator.
Related Commands ● threshold — specifies the minimum and maximum threshold values of the WRED profile. rate shape Define the rate-shaping method to be either as a measure of bytes or packets for each of the hierarchical QoS (HQoS) nodes at the leaf level to be applied to each queue.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.0) Added support for committed rate and committed burst size, and for configuration of rate limits on the S6000 platform. If you specify the pps keyword after the rate-shape command, the peak rate, peak burst, committed rate and committed burst are all considered to be values as a measure of packets.
Default pool1 Service-pool buffer 0 (default service-pool for both lossy and lossless traffic. traffic). number Enter a weight for the queue as a number in the range of 1 to 15. This parameter applies only if you specify the green or yellow drop precedence. string Enter the WRED profile name. It is a string of up to 32 characters. Or use one of the five pre-defined WRED profile names. Pre-defined Profiles: wred_drop, wredge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_.
Parameters Defaults Yellow Enter the yellow keyword. Traffic marked as yellow delivers traffic to the egress queue which either transmits the packet if it has available bandwidth or drops the packet due to no ability to send. Red Enter the red keyword. Traffic marked as red is dropped. dscp-list Enter a list of IP DSCP values. The dscp-list parameter specifies the full list of IP DSCP value(s) for the specified color.
Parameters Defaults map-name Enter the name of the DSCP color map. The map name can have a maximum of 32 characters. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. Version 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL.
Example Version Description 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. Display summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy summary Interface TE 1/10/1 TE 1/11/1 dscp-color-map mapONE mapTWO Display summary information about a color policy on a specific interface. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy summary te 1/10/1 Interface dscp-color-map TE 1/10/1 mapONE Displayed detailed color policy information on an interface.
Example Display all DSCP color maps. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-map Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Display a specific DSCP color map.
44 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Routing information protocol (RIP) is a distance vector routing protocol. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports both RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2). The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information about configuring RIP, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. This command triggers updates of the main RIP routing tables. debug ip rip Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting. S6000–ON Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | trigger] To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. default-information originate Generate a default route for the RIP traffic.
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The default route must be present in the switch routing table for the default-information originate command to take effect. default-metric Change the default metric for routes. To ensure that all redistributed routes use the same metric value, use this command with the redistribute command.
Related Commands ● redistribute — allows you to redistribute routes learned by other methods. description Enter a description of the RIP routing protocol. S6000–ON Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the RIP protocol (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
To return to the default values, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask] command. Parameters Defaults weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight (for prioritization). The default is 120. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), of the host or network to receive the new distance metric. mask If you enter an IP address, also enter a mask for that IP address, in either dotted decimal format or /prefix format (/x).
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to filter only directly connected routes.
ip poison-reverse Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value. S6000–ON Syntax ip poison-reverse To disable poison reverse, use the no ip poison-reverse command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
2 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 2 for RIP version 2. RIPv1 and RIPv2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths. neighbor Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information. S6000–ON Syntax neighbor ip-address To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command.
Usage Information Related Commands When a neighbor router is identified, unicast data exchanges occur. Multiple neighbor routers are possible. To ensure that only specific interfaces are receiving and sending data, use the passive-interface command with the neighbor command. ● passive-interface — sets the interface to only listen to RIP broadcasts. network Enable RIP for a specified network. To enable RIP on all networks connected to the switch, use this command.
offset-list Specify a number to add to the incoming or outgoing route metrics learned using RIP. S6000–ON Syntax offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface] To delete an offset list, use the no offset-list prefix-list-name {in | out} offset [interface] command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established Prefix list to determine which incoming routes are modified.
Related Commands ● ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list. output-delay Set the interpacket delay of successive packets to the same neighbor. S6000–ON Syntax output-delay delay To return to the switch software defaults for interpacket delay, use the no output-delay command. Parameters Defaults delay Specify a number of milliseconds as the delay interval. The range is from 8 to 50. Not configured.
passive-interface Suppress routing updates on a specified interface. S6000–ON Syntax passive-interface interface To delete a passive interface, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
redistribute Redistribute information from other routing instances. Syntax redistribute {connected | static} To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | static} command. Parameters Defaults connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed. static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed. Not configured.
Parameters tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-1 routes. level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1 and Level-2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-2 routes. metric metric- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16.
metric metric- value route-map map- name Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# show config ! router rip network 172.31.0.0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# show ip rip database Display the routes that RIP learns. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated.
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip rip database command shown in the following example. Field Description Total number of routes in RIP database Displays the number of RIP routes stored in the RIP database. 100.10.10.0/24 directly connected Lists the routes directly connected. 150.100.0.0 redistributed Lists the routes learned through redistribution. 209.9.16.0/24...
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
flush Defaults ● ● ● ● Enter the number of seconds to specify the time interval during which the route is advertised as unreachable. When this interval expires, the route is flushed from the routing table. The flush value should be greater than the update value. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. The default is 240 seconds.
Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands 1290 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
45 Remote Monitoring (RMON) Dell EMC Networking OS RMON is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring and long-term statistics collection.
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
rmon collection history Enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner name] [buckets number] [interval seconds] To remove a specified RMON history group of statistics collection, use the no rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer Defaults Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value.
rmon collection statistics Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner name] To remove RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the no rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer owner name Defaults Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the RMON Statistic Table.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to generate an RMON event log. This option sets the eventType to either log or log-and-snmptrap in the RMON event table. The default is None. trap community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trap followed by the SNMP community string to generate SNMP traps for an RMON event entry. This option sets the eventType to either snmptrap or log-and-snmptrap in the RMON event table. In addition to the SNMP traps, this option also generates a syslog.
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
show rmon Display the RMON running status including the memory usage. S6000–ON Syntax show rmon Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
show rmon alarms Display the contents of the RMON alarm table. S6000–ON Syntax show rmon alarms [index] [brief] Parameters Defaults index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON alarm table in an easy-to-read format. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) Example (Brief) 1298 This guide is platform-specific.
-------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 6 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 7 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 8 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 9 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 10 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 11 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 12 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 13 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 14 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 15 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 16 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 17 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 18 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 19 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 20 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 21 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 22 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 DellEMC# show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table.
Example (Index) Example (Brief) 1300 Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 111 -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 112 log -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 113 trap private -> DellEMC(conf)# rmon event 114 log trap public-> options DellEMC(conf)#do show rmon events RMON event entry 111 description: event type: none.
21 21 22 22 DellEMC# show rmon hc-alarm Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity alarm table. S6000–ON Syntax Parameters Defaults show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High-Capacity alarm table in an easy-to-read format. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) This guide is platform-specific.
falling threshold: 300, RMON event index: 4 alarm sampling failed 0 times. alarm owner: alarm storage type: non-volatile. alarm status: OK DellEMC# Example (Brief) DellEMC# show rmon hc-alarm brief index SNMP OID ---------------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 5 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 DellEMC# show rmon history Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet history table.
Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show rmon history 6001 RMON history control entry 6001 interface: ifIndex.
Usage Information Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The log table has a maximum of 500 entries.
Example (Index) Example (Brief) Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
6003 101236775 6004 101236775 9001 134529054 9002 134529054 9003 134791198 9004 134791198 DellEMC# 1306 Remote Monitoring (RMON) TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 2/1/1 3/2/1 3/2/1 3/1/1 3/1/1
46 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged local area network (LAN) that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges. Dell EMC Networking OS supports RSTP.
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters rapid spanning tree mode. debug spanning-tree rstp Enable debugging of RSTP and view information on the protocol.
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# debug spanning-tree rstp bpdu gigabitethernet 2/1/1 ? in Receive (in) out Transmit (out) description Enter a description of the rapid spanning tree.
disable Disable RSTP globally on the system. Syntax disable To enable Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults RSTP is disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the milli-second option to the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● forward-delay — changes the wait time before RSTP transitions to the Forwarding state. ● hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs.
Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# protocol spanning-tree rstp DellEMC(config-rstp)# no disable ● disable — disables RSTP globally on the system. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
guard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an RSTP interface and the current port state. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example (Brief) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Te 4/1/1 128.419 128 20000 FWD 20000 16384 0001.e801.6aa8 128.419 Te 4/8/1 128.426 128 20000 FWD 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.130 Te 4/9/1 128.427 128 20000 BLK 20000 8192 0001.e805.e306 128.131 Interface Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge ----------- ---- ------- --- ------- --------- ---Te 4/2/1 Desg 128.418 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes Te 4/1/1 Desg 128.419 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P Yes Te 4/8/1 Root 128.426 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No Te 4/9/1 Altr 128.
Parameters cost port-cost Enter the keyword cost then the port cost value. The range is from 1 to 200000.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added the optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.
47 Security The commands in this chapter are available on Dell EMC Networking OS. For configuration details, see the Security section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS implements LEAP with MSCHAP v2 supplicant.
Defaults exec Enter the keyword exec to send accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. dot1x Enter the keyword dot1x to send accounting information when a dot1x user has logged in. commands { level | role role-name } Enter the keyword commands then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level or enter the keyword role then the role name for accounting of commands executed by a user with that user role.
Privilege level 15 is the default. If you want to track usage at privilege level 1 for example, use the aaa accounting command 1 command.
aaa authentication login method-list none command is applied. To prevent the accounting records from being generated for sessions that do not have user names associated to them, use the aaa accounting suppress command. accounting Apply an accounting method list to terminal lines. Syntax Parameters Defaults accounting {exec | commands {level | role role-name} method-list exec Enter the keyword exec to apply an EXEC level accounting method list.
aaa radius group Configure the RADIUS server group that is used for Authentication, Authorization and Accounting. Syntax aaa radius group group-name To remove the RADIUS group configuration, use the no aaa radius group group-name command. Parameters Defaults group-name Enter the name of the RADIUS server group. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Added support for roles on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Added support for roles on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.
Defaults commands { level | role role-name } Enter the keyword commands followed by either a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level, or enter the keyword role then the role name for authorization of commands executed by a user with that user role. method-list Enter a method list that you defined using the aaa accounting exec or aaa accounting commands. none Command Modes LINE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
Defaults default Define the default list of authorization methods. local Use the authorization parameters on the system to perform authorization. tacacs+ Use the TACACS+ protocol to perform authorization. none Enter the keyword none to apply no authorization. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Added support for RADIUS.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Obscure Password Commands To enable the obscure password, use the following commands. service obscure-passwords Enable the obscuring of passwords and keys.
If you are using role-based access control (RBAC), only the system administrator and security administrator roles can enable the service obscure-password command. Related Commands ● show running-config— Display the current configuration and display changes from the default values. ● service password-encryption— Encrypts all passwords configured in the system. Authentication and Password Commands To manage access to the system, use the following the commands.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. By default, the Enable password is used. If you configure aaa authentication enable default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses the methods defined for Enable access instead.
... method4 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter up to four additional methods. In the event of a “no response” from the first method, the system applies the next configured method (up to four configured methods). Not configured (that is, no authentication is performed). Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
Related Commands ● ● ● ● login authentication — enables AAA login authentication on the terminal lines. password — creates a password. radius-server host — specifies a RADIUS server host. tacacs-server host — specifies a TACACS+ server host. aaa reauthenticate enable Enable re-authentication of user whenever there is a change in the authenticators. Syntax aaa reauthenticate enable To disable the re-authentication option, use the no aaa reauthenticate enable command.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
password Defaults Enter a text string up to 96 characters long. The first character of the password must be a letter. You cannot use spaces in the password. No password is configured. Command Modes LINE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Changed the maximum length of the password from 32 to 96. 9.10(0.
Parameters min-length number max-retry number lockout-period minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords min-length then the number of characters. The range is from 0 to 32 characters. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords max-retry then the number of maximum password retries. The range is from 0 to 16. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lockout-period then the number of minutes. The range is from 1 to 1440 minutes. The default is 0 minutes and the lockoutperiod is not enabled.
Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. In the following example, after 5 un-successful login attempts, the session (SSH/TELNET) goes into a locked state for 5 minutes. If all the 10 sessions are locked out with 5 un-successful attempts in each session, no users can login during the lockout-period.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 15. DellEMC# DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 14. DellEMC# DellEMC# show privilege Current privilege level is 10.
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show user command shown in the following example. Field Description (untitled) Indicates with an asterisk (*) which terminal line you are using.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
● 7 to indicate that a password encrypted using a DES hashing algorithm follows. This encryption type is available with the password option only. ● 5 to indicate that a password encrypted using an MD5 hashing algorithm follows. This encryption type is available with the secret option only, and is the default encryption type for this option. password Enter a string up to 32 characters long. dynamic-salt Enter the keyword dynamic-salt to have an additional random input in the password encryption process.
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To view the defined user names, use the show running-config user command. You can use the dynamic-salt option only under the secret and the password options. When you configure the password, the system alerts if your password does not match the following criteria. The system accepts your password even if these conditions are not met.
client Configures trusted DAC clients. Syntax client {ipv4-addr | ipv6-addr | hostname} [vrf vrf-name] [key [encryptiontype] key] To undo the DAC client configuration, enter the no client host command. Defaults Parameters If VRF is not configured, default VRF is considered. ipv4–addr Enter the keyword ipv4–addr to specify the IPv4 address of the DAC. ipv6–addr Enter the keyword ipv6–addr to specify the IPv6 address of the DAC. hostname Enter the keyword hostname to enter the name of the host.
Usage Information ● Configure global shared key applicable for DA clients. If client configuration has shared key configured, that will take precedence. Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.
Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FN-IOM, and MXL. coa-reauthenticate Configure NAS to re-authenticate dot1x user session requests from DAC. Syntax coa-reauthenticate To allow or reject re-authentication requests, enter the no coa-reauthenticate command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ● CONF-DYNAMIC-AUTH Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. da-rsp-timeout Configure timeout value for the back end task to respond to DAC requests. Syntax da-rsp-timeout minutes To undo the configuration, enter the no da-rsp-timeout command. Defaults Parameters 10 Minutes. minutes Enter the time out value.
dynamic-auth-enable Configure NAS to receive and process dynamic authorization messages. Syntax dynamic-auth-enable To stop NAS from receiving and processing dynamic authorization messages, use the no dynamicauth-enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ● CONF-DYNAMIC-AUTH Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information ● All dynamic authorization commands are configured by entering this mode. Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.
radius-server group Creates or deletes a group of radius servers. Syntax Parameters Defaults radius-server group group-name group-name Enter the group name that denotes the group of RADIUS servers. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
auth-port port- number acct-port port- number retransmit retries (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords auth-port then a number as the port number. The range is from zero (0) to 65535. The default port-number is 1812. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords acct-port then a number as the port number. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default port-number is 1813. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword retransmit then a number as the number of attempts. This parameter overwrites the radius-server retransmit command.
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To configure any number of RADIUS server hosts for each server host that is configured, use this command. Dell EMC Networking OS searches for the RADIUS hosts in the order they are configured in the software. The global default values for the timeout, retransmit, and key optional parameters are applied, unless those values are specified in the radius-server host or other commands.
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes RADIUS SERVER GROUP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
● 0 is the default and means the key is not encrypted and stored as clear text. ● 7 means that the key is encrypted and hidden. key Defaults Enter a string that is the key to be exchanged between the switch and RADIUS servers. It can be up to 96 characters long. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters Defaults retries Enter a number of attempts that the Dell OS tries to locate a RADIUS server. The range is from zero (0) to 100. The default is 3 retries. 3 retries Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
replay-protection-window Configure replay protection window period to drop the duplicate packets. Syntax replay-protection-window minutes To undo the configuration, enter the no replay-protection-window command. Defaults Parameters 5 Minutes. minutes Enter the number of minutes to drop the packets. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
TACACS+ Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports TACACS+ as an alternate method for login authentication. tacacs-server group Creates a group of TACACS servers to be used for Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting.. Syntax aaa tacacsgroup group-name To delete a group of TACACS servers, use the no tacacs-server group group-name command . Parameters Defaults group-name Enter the name of the TACACS server group. Not configured.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
Usage Information Example Related Commands You can associate a TACACS server group with a VRF. DellEMC(conf)# tacacs-server group group1 DellEMC(conf-tacacs-group)# tacacs-server host 1.1.1.1 key secret DellEMC(conf-tacacs-group)# tacacs-server host 2.2.2.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series.
● If an 802.1X port is authenticated and put in the RADIUS server assigned VLAN, any change to the port access VLAN configuration does not take effect. ● The 802.1X with VLAN assignment feature is not supported on trunk ports, dynamic ports, or with dynamic-access port assignment through a VLAN membership. dot1x authentication (Configuration) Enable dot1x globally; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. If the host responds to 802.1X with an incorrect login/password, the login fails. The switch attempts to authenticate again until the maximum attempts configured is reached. If the authentication fails after all allowed attempts, the interface is moved to the authentication failed VLAN.
dot1x guest-vlan Configure a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable. Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id To disable the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id command. Parameters Defaults vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-if-interface-slot/port[/subport]) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
dot1x mac-auth-bypass Enable MAC authentication bypass. If 802.1X times out because the host did not respond to the Identity Request frame, Dell EMC Networking OS attempts to authenticate the host based on its MAC address. Syntax [no] dot1x mac-auth-bypass Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The authenticator performs authentication only when port-control is set to auto. dot1x quiet-period Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a client. Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command.
Parameters Defaults interval seconds (Optional) Enter the keyword interval then the interval time, in seconds, after which re-authentication is initiated. The range is from 1 to 31536000 (1 year). The default is3600 (1 hour). 3600 seconds (1 hour) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Version Description 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x supplicant-timeout Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the supplicant time-out. Syntax dot1x supplicant-timeout seconds To return to the default, use theno dot1x supplicant-timeout command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds. The range is from 1 to 300, where 300 is implementation dependant. The default is 30.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. DellEMC#show dot1x interface fortyGigE 1/10 802.
Auth PAE State: Backend State: DellEMC# Initialize Initialize SSH and SCP Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports secure shell (SSH) protocol version 2.0. SSH is a protocol for secure remote login over an insecure network. SSH sessions are encrypted and use authentication. crypto key generate Generate keys for the SSH server. Syntax NOTE: Some of the parameters in this command require licensing to access. For more information, contact your Dell EMC Networking representative.
Usage Information The host keys are required for key-exchange by the SSH server. If the keys are not found when you enable the server (ip ssh server enable), the keys are automatically generated. This command requires user interaction and generates a prompt prior to overwriting any existing host keys. NOTE: Only a user with superuser permissions should generate host-keys. Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# crypto key generate rsa Enter key size <1024-2048>. Default<1024> : Host key already exists.
Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To configure the switch as an SCP server, use the ip ssh server command.
Usage Information Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command specifies the maximum number of attempts to authenticate a user on an SSH connection with the remote host for password authentication. SSH disconnects when the number of password failures exceeds authentication-retries. ip ssh challenge–response–authentication Enable challenge response authentication for SSHv2.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. If you enable this command, clients can log in without a password prompt. This command provides two levels of authentication: ● rhost-authentication is done with the file specified in the ip ssh rhostfile command. ● checking client host-keys is done with the file specified in the ip ssh pub-key-file command. NOTE: Administrators must specify the two files (rhosts and pub-key-file) to configure hostbased authentication.
To disable password-authentication, use the no ip ssh password-authentication enable command. Parameters Defaults enable Enter the keyword enable to enable password-authentication for the SSH server. Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.
command is a global configuration command, it does not appear in the running configuration because you only need to run this command once. The file contains the OpenSSH-compatible public keys of the host for which host-based authentication is allowed. An example known host file format: poclab4,123.12.1.
Example Usage Information DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)# ip ssh rhostsfile flash://shosts DellEMC(conf)# This command specifies the rhost file used for host-based authentication. This creates/ file overwrites the flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/shosts file and deletes the user-specified file. Even though this command is a global configuration command, it does not appear in the running configuration because you only need to run this command once.
ip ssh server Syntax NOTE: Some of the parameters in this command require licensing to access. For more information, contact your Dell EMC Networking representative. ip ssh server {ciphers cipher-list} {enable | port port-number} [kex keyexchange-algorithm] [mac hmac-algorithm][version 2] To disable SSH server functions, use the no ip ssh server {ciphers cipher-list} {enable | port port-number} [kex key-exchange-algorithm] [mac hmac-algorithm] command.
kex key-exchangealgorithm Enter the keyword kex and then a space-delimited list of key exchange algorithms supported by the SSH server. The following key exchange algorithms are available: ● diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1 ● diffie-hellman-group1-sha1 ● diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 When FIPS is enabled, the default key-exchange-algorithm is diffie-hellmangroup14-sha1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command enables the SSH server and begins listening on a port. If a port is not specified, listening is on SSH default port 22. NOTE: Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS Release 9.2(0.
Defaults vrf management Enter the keyword vrf followed by the keyword management to configure an SSH server on a management VRF. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF name to configure an SSH server on that VRF. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9000.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command is useful if the remote SSH client implements Strict Host Key Checking. You can copy the host key to your list of known hosts.
Example Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : aes256-ctr,aes256-cbc,aes192-ctr,aes192cbc,aes128-ctr,aes128-cbc,3des-cbc.
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command displays the contents of the flash://ADMIN_DIRssh/knownhosts file. DellEMC# show ip ssh client-pub-keys 4.8.1.
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command displays the contents of the flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorizedkeys.username file.
● 3des-cbc: Force ssh to use 3des-cbc encryption cipher. ● aes128-cbc : Force ssh to use aes128-cbc encryption cipher ● aes192-cbc : Force ssh to use aes192-cbc encryption cipher ● aes256-cbc : Force ssh to use aes256-cbc encryption cipher ● aes128-ctr : Force ssh to use aes128-ctr encryption cipher ● aes192-ctr : Force ssh to use aes192-ctr encryption cipher ● aes256-ctr : Force ssh to use aes256-ctr encryption cipher -l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -l then the user name used in this SSH session.
Version Description ● hmac-sha2-256-96 Usage Information Example 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Added support for the -c and -m parameters on the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 support. Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ● show ip dhcp snooping — display the contents of the DHCP binding table. ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82.
Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP Snooping globally. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Defaults interface type Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface to which the host is connected. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. slot/port Enter the slot and port number of the interface.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
ip dhcp source-address-validation Enable IP source guard. Syntax [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Usage Information When enabled, the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLANs. Related Commands ● ip dhcp snooping trust — configure an interface as trusted.
Role-Based Access Control Commands With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role. Users are granted permissions based on their user roles, not on their individual user ID. User roles are created for job functions and through those roles they acquire the permissions to perform their associated job function. This section describes the syntax and usage of RBAC-specific commands.
Related Commands login authentication, password, radius-server host, tacacs-server host role Changes command permissions for roles.
show role Display information on permissions assigned to a command, including user role and/or permission level. Syntax Parameters show role mode {mode} {command} command Enter the command’s keywords to assign the command to a certain access level. You can enter one or all of the keywords. mode mode Enter keyword then one of the following modes.
Example DellEMC# show userroles Role Inheritance netoperator netadmin secadmin sysadmin netoperator testadmin netadmin Modes Exec Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
inherit existingrole-name Defaults Enter the inherit keyword then specify the system defined role to inherit permissions from (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator). none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
ICMP Vulnerabilities The internet control message protocol (ICMP) is a network-layer internet protocol that provides message packets to report errors and other information regarding IP packet processing back to the source. Dell EMC Networking OS mainly addresses the following ICMP vulnerabilities: ● ● ● ● ICMP Mask Reply ICMP Timestamp Request ICMP Replies IP ID Values Randomness You can configure the Dell EMC Networking OS to drop ICMP reply messages.
The Dell EMC Networking OS does not suppress the following ICMPv6 message types: ● Packet too big (2) ● Echo request (128) ● Multicast listener query (130) ● Multicast listener report (131) ● Multicast listener done (132) ● Router solicitation (133) ● Router advertisement (134) ● Neighbor solicitation (135) ● Neighbor advertisement (136) ● Redirect (137) ● Router renumbering (138) ● MLD v2 listener report (143) ● Duplicate Address Request (157) ● Duplicate Address Confirmation (158) drop icmp Drops the ICM
● 0 directs the system to store the password as clear text. ● 7 directs the system to store the password with a dynamic salt. boot-password Defaults Enter the boot access password. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION. Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON.
startup-config Defaults Enter the keyword shartup-config to generate the hash checksum for the startup configuration using the MD5, SHA1, or SHA256 algorithm. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, Z9500, C9010, MXL, and FN-IOM.
● A minimum of one numeric character (0 to 9) ● A minimum of one special character including a space (" !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~") If your password does not meet the criteria, the system does not accept your password. If you use encryption type 9, the system stores the clear text password in an inaccessible location on the system. The show running-configuration command does not display the password. This configuration is not portable between different systems.
Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, Z9500, C9010, MXL, and FN-IOM. Dell EMC Networking OS supports MD5, SHA1, and SHA256.
48 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging is composed of virtual local area network (VLAN) Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider Backbone Bridging as described in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide Service Provider Bridging section. This section includes command line information (CLI) for the Dell EMC Networking OS Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. Dell EMC Networking OS supports L2PT on Dell EMC Networking OS.
Defaults in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. count value Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 100. Debug disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Example Related Command Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced Usage Information When you enable VLAN-Stacking, no protocol packets are tunneled. Related Command ● show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs.
protocol-tunnel rate-limit Enable traffic rate limiting per box. Syntax protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate To reset the rate limit to the default, use the no protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate command. Parameters Defaults rate Enter the rate in frames per second. The range is from 75 to 3000. The default is 75. 75 frames per second. Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN-STACK Command History Example Related Commands 1428 This guide is platform-specific.
show protocol-tunnel Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN. Syntax Parameters Defaults show protocol-tunnel [vlan vlan-id] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display information for the one VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Example (Specific VLAN) Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
49 sFlow The Dell EMC Networking OS supports sFlow commands. The Dell EMC Networking OS sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. ● The sFlow Agent combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the sFlow Collector. ● The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.
sflow collector Configure a collector device to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. Syntax sflow collector {ip-address | ipv6-address} agent-addr {ip-address | ipv6address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] [vrf management] To delete a configured collector, use the no sflow collector {ip-address | ipv6address} agent-addr {ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [number [max-datagramsize number]] | [max-datagram-size number] [vrf management] command.
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Introduced S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Expanded the no form of the command to mirror the syntax used to configure. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure up to two sFlow collectors (IPv4 or IPv6). If two collectors are configured, traffic samples are sent to both.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information sFlow is disabled by default. In addition to this command, sFlow needs to be enable on individual interfaces where sFlow sampling is desired.
sflow extended-switch enable Enable packing information on a switch only. Syntax sflow extended-switch enable To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-switch [enable] command. Parameters Defaults enable Enter the keyword enable to enable global extended information. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Parameters Defaults extended Enter the keyword extended to copy 256 bytes from the sample packets to sFlow datagram. 128 bytes Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information This command sets the counter polling interval for an interface. Related Commands ● sflow polling-interval (Global) — globally sets the polling interval. sflow sample-rate (Global) Change the global default sampling rate.
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Sample-rate is the average number of packets skipped before the sample is taken. This command changes the global default sampling rate. You can configure an interface to use a different sampling rate than the global sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power of 2 value.
Usage Information This command changes the sampling rate for an interface. By default, the sampling rate of an interface is set to the same value as the current global default sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power-of-2 value. Select one of these two number and re-enter the command. Related Commands ● sflow sample-rate (Global) — changes the sampling rate globally.
Usage Information Example The dropEvent counter (sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling) shown in the following example always displays a value of zero. DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global default extended maximum header size: 128 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.1, Agent IP addr: 1.1.1.
50 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This section contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. Both features are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • SNMP Commands Syslog Commands SNMP Commands The following SNMP commands are available in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Example Related Commands The following Example displays a group named ngroup.
RFC1213-MIB EtherLike-MIB SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB SNMP-MPD-MIB RMON-MIB --More— 1.3.6.1.2.1.35 1.3.6.1.6.3.10 1.3.6.1.2.1.67.1.2 1.3.6.1.6.3.11 1.3.6.1.2.1.16 show snmp supported-traps Display the list of SNMP traps supported by the platform. Syntax show snmp supported-traps Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
snmp context Configure SNMPv3 context name to map multiple OSPFv3 VRF instances. Syntax snmp context {context-name} To clear snmp context, use the no snmp context {context-name} command. Parameters Defaults context-name Enter the SNMP context name. The maximum length is 32 alphanumeric characters. None. Command Modes IPv6 ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. unknown Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC#config!------command run on host connected to switch: --------------! > snmpwalk -c public 10.10.10.130 .1.3.6.1.2.1.31 | grep -i alias | more IF-MIB::ifAlias.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
DellEMC(config-std-nacl)#seq 10 deny any count ! DellEMC(conf)# snmp-server community guest ro snmp-ro-acl DellEMC(conf)# Related Commands ● ip access-list standard — names (or selects) a standard access list to filter based on IP address. ● ipv6 access-list — configures an access list based on IPv6 addresses or protocols. ● show running-config — displays the current SNMP configuration and defaults. snmp-server contact Configure contact information for troubleshooting this SNMP node.
To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option] command. Parameters notification-type Enter the type of notification from the following list: ● bgp — Enable BGP state change traps. ● config — Enable copy-config trap. ● ecfm — Enable ECFM state change traps. ● ecmp — Enable ECMP traps. ● entity — Enable entity change traps. ● envmon — Enable SNMP environmental monitor traps. ● ets — Enable ETS traps. ● fips — Enable FIP Snooping state change traps.
Version Description 9.8(0.0) Added the following two SNMP notification options: syslog-reachable and syslog-unreachable. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1(0.0) Added support for copy-config and ECMP traps. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
Parameters group_name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group. The following groups are created for mapping to read/write community/security-names (defaults): ● v1v2creadg — maps to a community/security-name with ro permissions. ● 1v2cwriteg — maps to a community/security-name rw permissions. 1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3): ● 1 is the least secure version. ● 3 is the most secure of the security modes.
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.2 Added support for the access parameter. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information The following example specifies the group named harig as a version 3 user requiring both authentication and encryption and read access limited to the read named rview. NOTE: The number of configurable groups is limited to 16 groups.
● Version 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers twice the width of what is normally allowed. The default is version 1. auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a packet. priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and then scrambling of the packet.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1(0.0) Added support for config and ecmp traps. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Added support for VRRP traps. 7.6.1.
snmp-server location Configure the location of the SNMP server. Syntax snmp-server location text To delete the SNMP location, use the no snmp-server location command. Parameters Defaults text Enter an alpha-numeric text string, up to 55 characters long. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
udp-port port- number 1 | 2c | 3 Enter the keywords udp-port then the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) port number on the remote device. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 162. (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3): ● 1 is the least secure version. ● 3 is the most secure of the security modes. ● 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers twice the width of what is normally allowed. The default is 1.
Usage Information Version Description 9.6.(0.0) Added aes 128 encryption algorithm parameter. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. NOTE: For IPv6 ACLs, only IPv6 and UDP types are valid for SNMP. TCP and ICMP rules are not valid for SNMP. In IPv6 ACLs port rules are not valid for SNMP.
Syntax snmp-server user name {group_name remote ip-address udp-port port-number} [1 | 2c | 3] [encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password] [priv {des56 | aes128–cfb} priv– password] [access access-list-name | ipv6 access-listname | access-list-name ipv6 access-list-name] To remove a user from the SNMP group, use the no snmp-server user name {group_name remote ip-address udp-port port-number} [1 | 2c | 3] [encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password] [priv {des56 | aes128–cfb} priv-password] [access access-l
Related Commands ● show snmp user — Displays the information configured on each SNMP user name. snmp-server view Configure an SNMPv3 view. Syntax snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} To remove an SNMPv3 view, use the no snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} command. Parameters Defaults view-name Enter the name of the view (not to exceed 20 characters). oid-tree Enter the OID sub tree for the view (not to exceed 20 characters).
snmp-server vrf Configures an SNMP agent to bind to a specific VRF. Syntax snmp-server vrf vrf-name To undo the SNMP agent configuration, use the no snmp-server vrf vrf-name command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to associate an SNMP agent with that VRF. Not Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● show logging — display logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer. clear logging auditlog Clears audit log.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● logging console — set the logging console parameters. default logging monitor Return to the default settings for messages logged to the terminal.
default logging trap Return to the default settings for logging messages to the Syslog servers. Syntax default logging trap Defaults level = 6 or informational Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON.
Defaults tcp Enter the keyword tcp to enable transmission of log message over TCP followed by port number. vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to enable the logging process in VRF mode. NOTE: Use this attribute to specify the VRF that is used to contact the host. By default, the default VRF is used. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages are logged to the internal buffer. Syntax logging buffered [level] [size] To return to the default values, use the default logging buffered command. To disable logging stored to an internal buffer, use the no logging buffered command.
logging console Specify which messages are logged to the console. Syntax logging console [level] To return to the default values, use the default logging console command. To disable logging to the console, use the no logging console command. Parameters Defaults level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging. The default is 7 or debugging.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● local7 (local use) lpr (line printer system) mail (mail system) news (USENET news) sys9 (system use) sys10 (system use) sys11 (system use) sys12 (system use) sys13 (system use) sys14 (system use) syslog (Syslog process) user (user process) uucp (Unix to Unix copy process) The default is local7. Defaults local7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
To return to the default values, use the no logging history command. Parameters Defaults level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following equivalent words: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging. The default is 4 or warnings. warnings or 4 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information When you use the no logging on command, messages are logged only to the console. Related Commands ● ● ● ● logging logging logging logging — enable logging to the Syslog server. buffered — set the logging buffered parameters. console — set the logging console parameters. monitor — set the logging parameters for the terminal connections.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series, S55. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information To block a type of message parameter, set the logging trap level to a lower number. For example, to block severity messages at level 6, set the level to 5.
Example DellEMC(conf)#logging version ? <0-1> Select syslog version (default = 0) DellEMC(conf)#logging version 1 show logging auditlog Displays an audit log. Syntax show logging auditlog Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
Example (History) DellEMC#show logging history Syslog History Table: 1 maximum table entries, saving level Warnings or higher SNMP notifications not Enabled %RPM:0:0 %CHMGR-2-LINECARDDOWN - Line card 3 down - IPC timeout DellEMC# show logging driverlog stack-unit Display the driver log for the specified hardware component.
f10EepromBlkRead@psu0eeprom: Redundant block failed checksum calulated checksum 0xc9a6 actual chksum 0x0 5:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 57]EEPROM LIB ERR: f10EepromBlkRead@psu0eeprom: Redundant block failed errcode 6 6:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 51]EEPROM LIB ERR: f10EepromBlkRead@psu0eeprom, failed to get any good block 7:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 75]EEPROM LIB ERR: f10EepromBlkRead@psu0eeprom: Main block failed checksum calulated checksum 0x1d actual chksum 0x0 8:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 55]EEPROM LIB ERR: f10EepromBlkRead@psu0eeprom: Main
Version Description E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● logging monitor — set the logging parameters on the monitor/terminal.
51 SNMP Traps This section lists the traps sent by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Each trap is listed by the fields Trap Type, Trap Name, Object Name, and MIB file. Table 9. SNMP Trap List TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 1 TR_COLD_START 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 COLDSTART rfc3418.mib SNMP COLD_START trap sent. 2 TR_WARM_START 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 WARMSTART rfc3418.mib SNMP WARM_START trap sent. 3 TR_LINK_DOWN 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 LINKDOWN rfc3418.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 19 TR_CHM_RPM_U P 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.5 dellNetSysAlarmRp mUp DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The primary RPM generate this trap when the primary RPM or the secondary RPM is up and running. 20 TR_CHM_RPM_D OWN 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.6 dellNetSysAlarmRp mDown DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation the minor threshold. 28 TR_CHM_FANTRA 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 Y_BAD_CLR 6.1.5.1.14 dellNetSysAlarmFa nTrayClear DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The driver/agent generate this trap when a fan tray is now operational. 29 TR_CHM_MIN_FA NBAD_CLR 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.15 dellNetSysAlarmMi norFanBadClear DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME 42 TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation TR_STP_NEW_RO 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 OT newRoot BRIDGE-MIB.mib 802.1d new root trap support. 43 TR_STP_TOPOLO GY_CHANGE topologyChange BRIDGE-MIB.mib 802.1d topology change trap support. 44 TR_MSTP_NEW_R 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20. OOT_BRIDGE 2.0.1 Not Available Not Available MSTP Not Supporting 45 TR_MSTP_NEW_R 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20. OOT_PORT 2.0.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation type. Implementation of this trap is optional 55 TR_VRRPV3_LEAV 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 E_MASTER 6.1.5.1.44 dellNetSysAlarmVrr DELLpGoMaster NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The VRRP generate this trap when it become a backup 56 TR_VRRPV3_GIVE UP_MASTER dellNetSysAlarmVrr DELLpGiveupMaster NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation MEP has a persistent defect, it may or may not generate a Fault Alarm to warn the system administrator of the problem, as controlled by the MEP Fault Notification Generator State Machine and associated Managed Objects. If a defect with a higher priority is raised after a Fault Alarm has been issued, another Fault Alarm is issued.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation index into the MEP table (dot1agCfmMepTa ble). 62 TR_EOAM_THRSH 1.3.6.1.2.1.158.0.1 LD_EVT dot3OamThreshold Event stdeoam.mib "A dot3OamThreshold Event notification is sent when a local or remote threshold crossing event is detected.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation detected by the reception of an Ethernet OAM Event Notification OAMPDU that indicates a nonthreshold crossing event. This notification should not be sent more than once per second. The OAM entity can be derived from extracting the ifIndex from the variable bindings. The objects in the notification correspond to the values in a row instance of the dot3OamEventLog Table.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 68 TR_FIPS_ENODE_ DROP 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 2.4.0.5 dellNetENodeDrop pedTrap DELLNETWORKINGFIPSNOOPINGMIB.mib This trap is sent when a new ENode discovered is dropped, as the maximum allowed ENodes limit in the system is already reached 69 TR_FIPS_SESSION 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 _DROP 2.4.0.6 dellNetSessionReq uestDroppedTrap DELLNETWORKINGFIPSNOOPINGMIB.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation dellNetETSGlobalE nableTrap is enabled to send the trap for Peer Up or Peer Down 74 TR_ETS_OPER_ST 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.15 dellNetETSPortDcb DELLATE_CHANGE .4.0.4 xOperStateTrap NETWORKINGDCB-MIB.mib This trap is generated in the following conditions.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation enabled to send the trap for Peer Up or Peer Down 78 TR_PFC_OPER_S TATE_CHANGE 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.15 dellNetPFCPortDcb DELL.4.0.8 xOperStateTrap NETWORKINGDCB-MIB.mib This trap is generated in the following conditions. Whenever there is a change in the PFC Operational State and the dellNetPFCGlobalE nableTrap is enabled to send the trap for PFC state machine state change 79 TR_MPLS_TUNNE L_UP 1.3.6.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 92 TR_CHM_MIN_AL ARM_PS_CLR 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.19 dellNetSysAlarmMi norPSClr DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The agent generate this trap when a power supply minor alarm is cleared. 93 TR_CHM_MIN_FA NBAD 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.20 dellNetSysAlarmMi norFanBad DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The agent generate this trap when fan is bad. 94 TR_SYSADM_CPU _THRESHOLD 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation remote systems table maintenance polls. Note that transmission of lldpRemTablesChan ge notifications are throttled by the agent, as specified by the 'lldpNotificationInte rval' object. 103 TR_LLDP_MED_T OPOLOGY_CHAN GE lldp-ext-med.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps. 108 TR_RMON_HC_RI SING_THRESHOL D 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.29.2.0. hcRisingAlarm 1 rfc3434.mib The SNMP notification that is generated when a high capacity alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation conflict resolved during audit 113 TR_BATCH_CONFI 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5. batchConfigCommi G_IN_PROGRESS 1.2.0.4 tProgress DELLNETWORKINGCOPY-CONFIGMIB.mib The agent generate this trap when a configuration commit is initiated 114 TR_BATCH_CONFI 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5. batchConfigCommi G_COMPLETE 1.2.0.5 tCompleted DELLNETWORKINGCOPY-CONFIGMIB.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID 129 TR_VLT_ICL_STA TUS_CHANGE Object Name MIB File Explanation 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.17 dellNetVLTIclStatu .2.0.2 sChange DELLNETWORKINGVIRTUAL-LINKTRUNK-MIB.mib The agent generates this notification to denote the change in InterConnect Link Status.The notification contains information on the new ICL status. The possible states are as follows: 1. NotEstabished 2. LinkUp 3. LinkDown 4. LinkError" 130 TR_VLT_PEER_ST 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation in Bandwidth usage of ICL Link, when it crosses the threshold above 80 %. The possible states are as follows: 0. Below threshold 1. Above threshold" 133 TR_VLT_DOMAIN _CFG_ERROR 134 DELLNETWORKINGVIRTUAL-LINKTRUNK-MIB.mib The agent generates this notification to denote there is a error/conflict in the VLT domain config parameters (either locally or in remote node which prevent the peer up.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation generated when the value of entLastChangeTim e changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to trigger logical/physical entity table maintenance polls. An agent should not generate more than one entConfigChange 'notification-event' in a given time interval (five seconds is the suggested default). A 'notification-event' is the transmission of a single trap or inform PDU to a list of notification destinations.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation throttling or transmission loss. 139 TR_CHM_STACK_ UNIT_ROLE 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.46 dellNetSysAlarmSta DELLckUnitRoleChanged NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib Trap generated when a stack unit's role in a stack changes to management/ standby/member 140 TR_CHM_VERSIO N_MISMATCH 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.23 dellNetSysAlarmCa DELLrdVersionMismatch NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 148 TR_BRM_PE_UNI T_DOWN 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.30 dellNetSysAlarmPE UnitDown DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The driver/agent generate this trap when a PE Unit operational status is down 149 TR_SYSLOG_SER VER_CONNECTIO N_SUCCESSFUL 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3 0.1.1.2 Not Available Not Available Connecting to server with Valid configuration. 150 TR_SYSLOG_SER VER_CONNECTIO N_FAILURE 1.3.6.1.4.
52 Stacking All commands in this chapter are specific to the Dell EMC Networking OS. You can use the commands to pre-configure a switch, so that the configuration settings are invoked when the switch is attached to other S-Series units. For information about using the S-Series stacking feature, see the Stacking S-Series Switches section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. CAUTION: You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with virtual link trunking (VLT).
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Added the members option. Usage Information Enabling this command keeps the failed switch in the Failed state. The switch does not reboot until it is manually rebooted. When enabled, it is not displayed in the running-config. When disabled, it is displayed in the running-config. Related Commands show redundancy — displays the current redundancy status.
redundancy protocol Enable hitless failover for a protocol. Syntax redundancy protocol Protocols Defaults lacp Enter the LACP protocol xstp Enter one of the following protocols: STP, RSTP, MSTP, PVST. Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Added the hard reset option. Resetting the management unit is not allowed, and an error message displays if you try to do so. Resetting is a soft reboot, including flushing the forwarding tables. Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, you can run this command directly on the stack standby unit (standby master) to reset the standby. You cannot reset any other unit from the standby unit.
● grep — show only text that matches a pattern. ● no-more — do not paginate the output. ● save — save the output to a file.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. The following describes the show system stack-ports command shown in the following example. Field Description Topology Lists the topology of stack ports connected: Ring, Daisy chain, or Standalone.
priority-value Defaults This preference parameter allows you to specify the management priority of one backup switch over another, with 1 as the lowest priority and 14 being the highest. The switch with the highest priority value is chosen to become the management unit if the active management unit fails or on the next reload. 1 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
Related Commands ● reload – reboot the Dell EMC Networking OS. ● show system – display the status of all stack members or a specific member. stack-unit stack-group Configure the stacking unit and stacking group by specifying an ID when adding units to a stack to ensure the unit is assigned to the correct group. Syntax stack-unit unit-id stack-group stack-group-id To remove the current stack group configuration, use the no stack-unit unit-id stack-group stack-id command.
Defaults stack-unit Enter the stack-unit number. The range is from 1 to 6. all Enter the keyword all to copy the designated image to all stack members. A Enter the keyword A to upgrade all stacked units in System A ( only). B Enter the keyword B to upgrade all stacked units in System B ( only). none Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
53 Storm Control The Dell EMC Networking OS storm control feature allows you to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm (Broadcast/ Unknown Unicast Rate Limiting or Multicast on the C-Series and S-Series). Storm control is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Important Points to Remember ● Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (virtual local area networks [VLANs] and link aggregation group [LAG] interfaces are not supported).
• • storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface) xoff-state threshold polling-count disable storm-control pfc You can disable the PFC storm globally. Syntax disable Parameters None Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-storm-control-pfc) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Example Use the storm-control pfc command in the configuration mode to enter the 'storm-control-pfc' configuration mode. The commands provisioned in this mode are applicable for all the interfaces that have PFC storm enabled. DellEMC(conf)#storm-control pfc DellEMC(conf-storm-control-pfc)#polling-interval 200 queue-drop backoff-force You can remove the queue-drop state after the specified number of polling is done.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S6000–ON, S61000–ON, Z9100–ON. Usage Information The queue-drop backoff-on-norxpfc polling-count command is used to remove the queuedrop state if additional PFCs are not received for the specified number of polling intervals. Example Use the storm-control pfc command in the configuration mode to enter the ‘storm-control-pfc' configuration mode.
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. show storm-control multicast Display the storm control multicast configuration. Syntax Parameters Defaults show storm-control multicast [interface] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific storm control configuration: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
Te 1/1/1 Ingress 5 DellEMC# show storm-control pfc status You can view the status of the PFC storm on a stack unit with specific port set. Syntax show storm-control pfc status stack-unit {unit-number} port-set {portpipenumber} Parameters unit-number Enter the stack unit number. portpipe-number Enter the port set number. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege. Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Te 1/1/1 Te 1/1/1 Te 1/1/2 Te 1/1/3 Te 1/1/4 Te 1/1/5 Te 1/1/8 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# show storm-control unknown-unicast Display the storm control unknown-unicast configuration.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMUX (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added the percentage decimal value option. 6.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Added the percentage decimal value option. 6.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. storm-control PFC/LLFC Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC frames more than the configured rate. Syntax storm-control pfc-llfc [pps]in shutdown Parameters Defaults pfc-llfc in Enter the keyword pfc-llfc to get the flow control traffic. The range is from 0 to 33554368 packets per second.
storm-control pfc in queue-drop-state clear You can clear the queue-drop state on an interface where the PFC storm has been triggered. Syntax storm-control pfc in queue-drop-state clear Parameters None Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMUX (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-series and S-Series. Broadcast traffic (all 0xFs) should be counted against the broadcast storm control meter, not against the multicast storm control meter.
storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration) Configure the percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed in or out of the network. Syntax storm-control unknown-unicast [packets_per_second in] To disable storm control for unknown-unicast traffic, use the no storm-control unknownunicast [packets_per_second in] command. Parameters Defaults packets_per_sec ond in Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554368.
Parameters percentage E-Series Only: Enter the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in or out of the decimal_value [in network. Optionally, you can designate a decimal value percentage, for example, | out] 55.5%. The percentage is from 0 to 100: ● 0% blocks all related traffic. ● 100% allows all traffic into the interface. The decimal range is from 0.1 to 0.9.
Defaults 2 Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-storm-control-pfc) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S6000–ON, S61000–ON, Z9100–ON. Usage Information The xoff-state threshold polling-count command is used to set the number of times the polling should be done.
54 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The commands in this section configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol (STP) and are supported on the Dell EMC Networking switch/routing platform. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • bridge-priority bpdu-destination-mac-address debug spanning-tree description disable forward-delay hello-time max-age protocol spanning-tree show config show spanning-tree 0 spanning-tree bridge-priority Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D spanning tree.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. bpdu-destination-mac-address Use the Provider Bridge Group address in Spanning Tree or GVRP PDUs.
To disable debugging, use the no debug spanning-tree command. Parameters stp-id Enter zero (0). The switch supports one spanning tree group with a group ID of 0. protocol Enter the keyword for the type of STP to debug, either mstp, pvst, or rstp. all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations. bpdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug bridge protocol data units. config (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword config to debug configuration information.
Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the spanning tree (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-stp”.) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON.
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol spanning-tree — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● max-age — changes the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information. ● hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. hello-time Set the time interval between generation of the spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). Syntax hello-time seconds To return to the default value, use the no hello-time command.
max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the spanning tree bridge. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a number of seconds the Dell EMC Networking OS waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
Example Field Description “Designated port...” Displays the designated port ID. DellEMC# show spann 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.0a56 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 We are the root of the spanning tree Current root has priority 32768 address 0001.e800.
Example (Guard) Field Description Interface Name STP interface. Instance STP 0 instance. Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard).
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
55 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide.
Usage Information ● When you run the command, the system displays a message with the information directing to the URL for further information. ● Even before you accept or reject the EULA, the configuration data is sent to the default centrally deployed SupportAssist Server. If you reject the EULA, the configuration data is not transmitted to the SupportAssist server. ● If there is an existing SupportAssist configuration, the configuration is not removed and the feature is disabled.
Related Commands ● support-assist — moves to the SupportAssist Configuration mode. support-assist Move to the SupportAssist configuration mode. Syntax support-assist To remove all the configuration of the SupportAssist service, use the no support-assist command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
support-assist activity Trigger an activity event immediately. Syntax support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now Parameters full-transfer Enter the keyword full-transfer to specify transfer of configuration, inventory, logs, and other information. core-transfer Enter the keyword core-transfer to specify transfer of core files. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. Introduced the core-transfer and event-transfer parameters. Usage Information 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. By default, each activity follows a set of default actions using a default schedule.
Parameters first-name (Optional) Enter the first name for the contact person. This is optional provided each contact person name is unique. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. last-name Enter the last name for the contact person. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
server Configure the name of the remote SupportAssist Server and move to SupportAssist Server mode. Syntax server {default | server-name} To delete a server, use the no server server-name command. Parameters Defaults default Enter the keyword default for the default server. server-name Enter the name of the custom server to which the logs would be transferred. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. Default server has URL stor.g3.ph.dell.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.
Related Commands ● action-manifest get — copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system. ● action-manifest show — view the list of action-manifest for a specific activity. ● action-manifest remove — remove the action-manifest file for an activity. action-manifest remove Remove the action-manifest file from Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax Parameters action-manifest remove } local-file-name Enter the name of the local action-manifest file.
Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. ● action-manifest get — copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system. ● action-manifest install — configure the action-manifest to use for a specific activity. ● action-manifest remove — remove the action-manifest file for an activity. enable Enable a specific SupportAssist activity.
To remove the complete company contact information, use the no address command. Parameters city company- city province | region | state name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword city then the city or town for the company site. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword province, region or state then the name of province, region or state for the company site. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes.
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. This command is optional for SupportAssist service configuration. territory Configure the territory and set the coverage for the company site.
Parameters primary email- address alternate emailaddress Enter the keyword primary then the primary email address for the person. Enter the keyword alternate then the alternate email address for the person. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST PERSON Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM.
Related Commands ● preferred-method — configure the preferred method for contacting the person. preferred-method Configure the preferred method for contacting the person. Syntax preferred-method {email | no-contact | phone] Parameters Defaults email Enter the keyword email to specify email as preferred method. no-contact Enter the keywords no-contact to specify that there is no preferred method. phone Enter the keyword phone to specify phone as preferred method.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. This command is optional for SupportAssist service configuration. SupportAssist Server Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following SupportAssist Server mode commands. proxy-ip-address Configure a proxy for reaching the SupportAssist remote server.
Usage Information The passwords are stored encrypted in the running configuration. enable Enable communication with the SupportAssist server. Syntax enable To disable communication to a specific SupportAssist server, use the no enable command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST SERVER Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
Usage Information The URL should be formatted to follow the ISO format. show eula-consent Display the EULA for the feature. Syntax Parameters show eula-consent {support-assist | other feature} support-assist | other feature Enter the keywords support-assist or the text corresponding to other feature. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
allow Dell to transmit and store the Collected Data from SupportAssist in accordance with these terms. You agree that the provision of SupportAssist may involve international transfers of data from you to Dell and/or to Dells affiliates, subcontractors or business partners. When making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist.
preferred-method email time-zone zone +05:30 start-time 12:23 end-time 15:23 ! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.1:1332 DellEMC# show support-assist status Display information on SupportAssist feature status including any activities, status of communication, last time communication sent, and so on. Syntax show support-assist status Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
56 System Time and Date The commands in this section configure time values on the system, either using the Dell EMC Networking OS, or the hardware, or using the network time protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to an NTP clock host. For more information, see “Network Time Protocol” of the Management section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Defaults end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. end-year Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. offset (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
● week-number: Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time. ● first: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the first week of the month. ● last: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the last week of the month. Defaults start-day Enter the name of the day that you want daylight saving time to begin. Use English three letter abbreviations; for example, Sun, Sat, Mon, and so on. The range is from Sun to Sat.
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Updated the start-day and end-day options to allow for using the three-letter abbreviation of the weekday name. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ntp trusted-key — configures a trusted key. ● clock summer-time date — sets a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis. ● show clock — displays the current clock settings.
Usage Information Coordinated universal time (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. debug ntp Display Network Time Protocol (NTP) transactions and protocol messages for troubleshooting.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You also must configure an authentication key for NTP traffic using the ntp authentication-key command. ntp broadcast client Set up the interface to receive NTP broadcasts from an NTP server.
ntp control-key-passwd Configure control key password for NTPQ authentication. NTP control key supports encrypted and unencrypted option. Syntax ntp control-key-passwd [encryption-type] password To delete the control key, use the no ntp control-key-passwd [encryption-type] password command. Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers: ● 0 (zero) directs the system to store the password as clear text. It is the default encryption type when using the password option.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ntp master Configure the switch as NTP Server. Syntax Parameters Defaults ntp master ntp Enter the stratum number to identify the NTP Server's hierarchy.
ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of NTP server. hostname Enter the host name of the server. key keyid (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword key and a number as the NTP peer key. The range is from 1 to 65534. prefer (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prefer to indicate that this peer has priority over other servers. version number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version and a number to correspond to the NTP version used on the server. The range is from 1 to 4.
When the Dell EMC Networking OS NTP client receives inconsistent timestamp in the origin timestamp filed, it logs the syslog message. It is due to the older versions of NTPD server implementation. Upgrade the system to the latest NTPD package in the NTP server and the system logs the following NTP syslog message: Dell EMC# May 30 13:27:46 %STKUNIT2-:CP %ntp-6-: receive: Unexpected origin timestamp 0xdeb95bee.06ba346e does not match aorg 0000000000.00000000 from server@10.16.151.117 xmt 0xdeb95bee.
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
Version Description 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information The number parameter in the ntp trusted-key command must be the same number as the number parameter in the ntp authentication-key command. If you change the ntp authenticationkey command, you must also change the ntp trusted-key command. Related Commands ● ntp authentication-key—sets an authentication key for NTP. ● ntp authenticate—enables the NTP authentication parameters you set.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. After configuring the ntp authentication-key command, configure the ntp trusted-key command to complete NTP authentication. Dell EMC Networking OS versions 8.2.1.0 and later use an encryption algorithm to store the authentication key that is different from previous Dell EMC Networking OS versions; beginning in version 8.2.1.
Example Example (Detail) Related Commands DellEMC#show clock 11:05:56.949 UTC Thu Oct 25 2001 DellEMC# DellEMC# show clock detail 12:18:10.691 UTC Wed Jan 7 2009 Time source is RTC hardware Summer time starts 02:00:00 UTC Sun Mar 8 2009 Summer time ends 02:00:00 ABC Sun Nov 1 2009 DellEMC# ● clock summer-time recurring — displays the time and date from the switch hardware clock. show ntp associations Display the NTP master and peers.
Field Description ● - means the peer is a candidate for selection. ● x means designated falsesticker by the intersection algorithm. Example (without ntp master configuration) Example (with ntp master configuration) remote Displays the remote IP address of the NTP peer. ref clock Displays the IP address of the remote peer’s reference clock. st Displays the peer’s stratum, that is, the number of hops away from the external time source. A in this column means the NTP peer cannot reach the time source.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ntp status command shown in the Example below. Field Description “Clock is...” States whether or not the switch clock is synchronized, which NTP stratum the system is assigned and the IP address of the NTP peer. “frequency is...
57 Tunneling Tunneling is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • ip unnumbered ipv6 unnumbered tunnel allow-remote tunnel destination tunnel dscp tunnel flow-label tunnel hop-limit tunnel keepalive tunnel-mode tunnel source ip unnumbered Configure a tunnel interface to operate without a unique IPv4 address and select the interface from which the tunnel borrows its address.
Usage Information The ip unnumbered command fails in two conditions: ● If the logical ip address is configured. ● If Tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible). To ping the unnumbered tunnels, the logical address route information must be present at both the ends. NOTE: The ip unnumbered command can specify an interface name that does not exist or does not have a configured IPv6 address.
tunnel allow-remote Configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address or prefix whose tunneled packets are accepted for decapsulation. If you do not configure allow-remote entries, tunneled packets from any remote peer address is accepted. This feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax tunnel allow-remote {ip-address | ipv6-address} [mask] To delete a configured allow-remote entry use the no tunnel allow-remote command. Any specified address/mask values must match an existing entry for the delete to succeed.
Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the destination IPv4 address for the tunnel. ipv6–address Enter the destination IPv6 address for the tunnel. none Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL (conf-if-tu) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S4810, S4820T, Z9000.
tunnel hop-limit Configure the method to set the IPv4 time-to-live or the IPv6 hop limit value in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel hop-limit value To restore the default tunnel hop-limit, use the no tunnel hop-limit command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the hop limit (ipv6) or time-to-live (ipv4) value to include in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 64.
Defaults Tunnel keepalive is disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added the decapsulate-any command. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000 and Z9000. To enable a tunnel interface, use this command.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added the tunnel source anylocal command. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000 and Z9000. Added an optional keyword “anylocal” to the tunnel source command.
58 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if you use this with NIC teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. ● downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface.
description Enter a text description of an uplink-state group. Syntax description text Parameters Defaults text Text description of the uplink-state group. The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.
Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. ● downstream — assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. ● uplink-state-group — create an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links.
enable Enable uplink state group tracking for a specific UFD group. Syntax enable To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command. Defaults Upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group. Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. Example Related Commands ● show uplink-state-group — displays the status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups.
uplink-state-group Create an uplink-state group and enable the tracking of upstream links on a switch or router. Syntax uplink-state-group group-id To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no uplink-state-group group-id command. Parameters Defaults group-id Enter the ID number of an uplink-state group. The range is from 1 to 16. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
upstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream interface. Syntax upstream interface To delete an uplink-state group, use the no upstream interface command.
59 VLAN Stacking With the virtual local area network (VLAN)-stacking feature (also called stackable VLANs and QinQ), you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports this feature. For more information about basic VLAN commands, see the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section in Layer 2.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. When packets are colored green; no packets are dropped.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Enable DEI before using this command. dei mark Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet. S6000–ON Syntax Parameters Defaults dei mark {green | yellow} {0 | 1} 0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color. green | red | yellow Choose a color: ● Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
member Assign a stackable VLAN access or trunk port to a VLAN. The VLAN must contain the vlan-stack compatible command in its configuration. Syntax member interface To remove an interface from a Stackable VLAN, use the no member interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel, and then a number.
stack-group-id Enter the stack group ID. The range is from 0 to 16. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to enabling this command, to place the interface in Layer 2 mode, enter the switchport command.
Version Description E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to disabling the stackable VLAN feature, remove the members. To view the stackable VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode. Stackable VLANs contain members, designated by the M in the Q column of the command output. If you enabled VRF, you cannot enable the stacked VLAN feature using this command. If you enabled IGMP snooping, you cannot enable the stacked VLAN feature using this command.
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. You can separate the C-Tag values by commas or dashed ranges. In the case of conflicts, dynamic mode CoS overrides any Layer 2 QoS configuration.
Usage Information For specific interoperability limitations regarding the S-Tag TPID, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. The four characters you may enter are shown in the following table. Related Commands Number Resulting TPID 1 0x0001 10 0x0010 81 0x0081 8100 0x8100 ● portmode hybrid — sets a port (physical ports only) to accept both tagged and untagged frames. A port configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
Version Description E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to using this command, to place the interface in Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command. To remove the trunk port designation, first remove the port (using the no member interface command) from all stackable VLAN-enabled VLANs. In Example 1, a VLAN-Stack trunk port is configured and then made part of a single-tagged VLAN. In Example 2, the tag protocol identifier (TPID) is set to 88A8.
DellEMC(conf-if-te-5/1/1)# vlan-stack trunk DellEMC(conf-if-te-5/1/1)# exit DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# member Te 4/1/1, Te 3/10/1, TenGi 5/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 30 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# untagged TenGi 5/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 40 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# tagged TenGi 5/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# VLAN Stacking 160
60 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to coexist on the same router at the same time. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ip unknown-unicast ipv6 unknown-unicast description ip vrf forwarding ip http vrf ip route-export ip route-import ipv6 route-export ipv6 route-import match source-protocol redistribute interface management maximum dynamic-routes show ip vrf show run vrf ip unknown-unicast Enable IPv4 catch-all route.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S–Series. Use this command to add the IPv4 catch-all route (0.0.0.0/0) in the LPM route forwarding table if it was deleted using the no ip unknown-unicast command previously. This will be the default configuration after reload. ipv6 unknown-unicast Disable soft forwarding of unknown IPv6 destination packets.
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. ip vrf forwarding Attach an interface to a VRF.
You can configure an IP subnet or address on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP subnet or address configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If you assign two interfaces to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address to them.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. To make the HTTP clients VRF-aware, use the ip http vrf command. The HTTP client uses the VRF name that you specify to reach the HTTP server. If you do not specify a VRF name, the HTTP client uses the default VRF. ip route-export Enables route leaking between VRFs.
though the target VRF has specified filtering options to match BGP, the BGP route is not leaked as that route is not active in the Source VRF. Related Commands ● ip route-import — imports routes from another VRF. ip route-import Imports IPv4 routes that another VRF leaks using the VRF tag during the export of these routes. Syntax Parameters ip route-import tag [route-map—name] route-import Enter the keywords route-import to import routes into the VRF.
Parameters Defaults route-export Enter the keywords route-export to leak or share routes between VRFs. tag Enter a tag (ASN number) as the export route target to expose routes to other VRFs. This tag acts as an identifier for exported routes. Use this identifier while importing these routes into another nondefault VRF. route-map-name (Optional) Enter the name of the route-map to filter the exported routes. You can leak global routes to be made available to VRFs.
Defaults tag Enter a tag (ASN number) to specify an import route target for importing routes from another VRF. To import leaked routes from another VRF, use the same ASN number that is specified as the export route target at the source VRF. route-map-name Enter the name of the route-map to filter the imported routes. NOTE: Use the route-map attribute while importing routes from the global RTM.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. Specify the matching criteria only after defining a route-map.
Related Commands ● ip route-import — import routes from another VRF. interface management Associates a management port with a management VRF. Syntax interface management To delete the association between a management port and a management VRF, use the no interface management command. Command Modes VRF MODE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-VRF Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Fo Ma Ma Ma Ma Ma Ma Nu 0, test1 test2 management 1 2 64 DellEMC# show ip vrf test1 VRF-Name test1 DellEMC# 1/9/1,1/7/1,1/8/1,1/10/2, 1/1, 2/1, 3/1, 4/1, 5/1, 6/1, Vl 1 Te 1/25/1,1/28/4-1/29/3 Te 1/32/1 VRF-ID Interfaces 1 Te 1/29/4,1/30/1-1/31/3 show run vrf Displays configuration information corresponding to all the VRFs in the system. Syntax Parameters show run vrf vrf-name vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF.
61 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
proxy-gateway static Enables the proxy-gateway feature using static configurations. Syntax [no] proxy-gateway static Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. You must configure the VLT port channel interface which is connecting to the remote VLT domain as peer-domain-link.
vlt-peer-mac transmit Enables the device to transmit the peer MAC address along with its own MAC address in LLDP TLV packets to the remote VLT domain. S6000–ON Syntax [no] vlt-peer-mac transmit Command Modes VLT DOMAIN PROXY GW LLDP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
62 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
back-up destination Configure the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer used as the VLT backup link endpoint for sending out-of-band (OOB) hello messages. Syntax Parameters Defaults back-up destination {[ipv4–address] | [ipv6 ipv6–address] [interval seconds] vrf [management vrf-name | vrf-name]} ipv4–address Enter the IPv4 address of the backup destination. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 then an IPv6 address in the X:X:X:X::X format.
clear vlt statistics Clear the VLT operation statistics. Syntax clear vlt statistics [arp | domain | igmp-snoop | mac | multicast | ndp] Parameters domain Clear the VLT statistics for the domain. multicast Clear the VLT statistics for multicast. mac Clear the VLT statistics for the MAC address. arp Clear the VLT statistics for ARP. igmp-snoop Clear the VLT statistics for IGMP snooping. ndp Clear the VLT statistics for NDP.
delay-restore Configure the delay in bringing up VLT ports after reload or peer-link restoration between the VLT peer switches. Syntax Parameters Defaults delay-restore delay-restore Enter the amount of time, in seconds, to delay bringing up the VLT ports after the VLTi device reloads or after the peer-link restores between VLT peer switches. The range from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Not configured. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History This guide is platform-specific.
This delay restore timer applies only during reload/boot-up and not in other scenarios (for example, during ICL flap). Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Added port-channel parameter on the S4810. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. LACP on the VLT ports (on a VLT switch or access device), which are members of the VLT, are not brought up until the VLT domain is recognized on the access device.
Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Added support for the peer-down-vlan option. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. To configure the VLAN from where the VLT peer forwards packets received over the VLTi from an adjacent VLT peer that is down, use the peer-down-vlan option.
peer-routing-timeout Configure the delay after which peer routing disables when the peer is unavailable. This command is applicable for both IPv6 and IPv4. Syntax peer-routing-timeout value To restore the default value, use the no peer-routing-timeout command. Parameters value Enter the timeout value (in seconds). The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is infinity. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Default Infinity Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Usage Information Example (Brief) Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. The version shown in the show vlt brief output command displays the VLT version number which is different from the Dell EMC Networking OS version number. VLT version numbers begin with odd numbers.
Example Version Description 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.18 Up 1 3 34998 1026 1025 show vlt counters Displays counter information.
Usage Information Example Example (igmpsnoop) Example (igmpsnoop interface port-channel) If you do not add a parameter such as arp or mac, the output displays all the counters.
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
-----------------------(22.22.22.200, 225.1.1.2) VLAN 5 (*, 225.1.1.2) VLAN 15 DellEMC# --------VLAN 6 te 1/5/1 show vlt mismatch Display mismatches in VLT parameters. Syntax show vlt mismatch Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Updated to show mismatch in VXLAN instance parameters. 9.10(0.
DellEMC# DellEMC#show vlt mismatch Domain -----Parameters Local -------------- Peer ---- Vlan-config --------------------------------Vlan-ID Local Mode Peer Mode --------- ------------ --------20 L2 Vlan IPV4 Multicast Status -------------------------Vlan-ID Local Status ------------------55 Inactive 1500 Inactive -- Peer Status ----------Active Active VLT-VXLAN config --------------VLAN to VNI config mismatch -------------------------------------Vlan-ID Local VNID Peer VNID ------------------------
Vlan-stack Vlan-ID ------- Local ----- 100 N Peer ---M Port-type-config ---------------Codes:: p - PVLAN Promiscuous port, h - PVLAN Host port, t - PVLAN Trunk port, mt - Vlan-stack trunk port, mu - Vlan-stack access port, n Normal port Vlt Lag ------128 Local ----mt Peer ---mu Vlan-stack protocol-type -----------------------Local ----0x4100 Peer ---0x8100 VLT-VLAN config --------------Local Lag --------128 Peer Lag Local VLANs -------- ----------128 4094 Peer VLANs ---------100 DellEMC# show
Example Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
Related Commands Example Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.2) Added parameters multicast and ndp 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Added support in the output for ARP, MAC, and IGMP snooping. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. ● clear vlt statistics — clears the statistics on VLT operations. NOTE: The following example shows the statistics for all the VLT parameters.
NDP NA Non-VLT Tunnel Pkts sent:0 NDP NA Non-VLT Tunnel Pkts Rcvd:0 Ndp-sync Pkts Sent:144 Ndp-sync Pkts Rcvd:105 Ndp Reg Request sent:25 Ndp Reg Request rcvd:24 show vlt statistics igmp-snoop Displays the informational packets and IGMP control PDUs that are exchanged between VLT peer nodes. Syntax show vlt statistics igmp-snoop Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
Defaults Automatically assigned based on the MAC address of each VLT peer. The peer with the lower MAC address is assigned unit 0; the peer with the higher MAC address is assigned unit 1. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information The VLT domain ID must be the same between the two VLT devices. If the domain ID is not the same, a syslog message generates and VLT does not launch.
63 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
vlan Enter the keyword vlan to clear MAC address from a specific vlan. vxlan Enter the keyword vxlan to clear MAC address from a specific vxlan. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.
Defaults Disabled Command Modes VXLAN INSTANCE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.1P10) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S6000.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.1P10) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. vxlan-instance— Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. feature vxlan Enable VXLAN configuration globally on the platform. Syntax feature vxlan To disable the VXLAN, use the no feature vxlan command.
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.1P10) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. vxlan-instance — Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. local-vtep-ip Set the local IP Address to be used as the source IP for VXLAN tunnels.
Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. Usage Information The retry interval value caps at the value configured on the max-backoff. Related Commands vxlan-instance — Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. peer-ovsdbserver-ip Specify the IP address of the peer OVSDB server in a VLT setup.
Usage Information Use this command to associate a specific VNID to a remote VTEP. Provide a valid profile name while associating to the remote VTEP. NOTE: The remote VTEP IP Address cannot be any of the local IP Addresses configured in the switch. vnid Associate a range of VNID numbers to a specific VNI profile. Syntax vnid VNID-Range To remove the association, use the no vnid command. Parameters Defaults VNID-Range Enter the range of VNIDs that need to be members of the specific VNI profile.
vxlan-instance Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. Syntax vxlan-instance instance ID [nsx | nuage | static] To delete vxlan-instance from the system, use no vxlan-instance instance ID command. Parameters instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID. The platform supports only the instance ID 1. nsx Enter the keyword nsx to connect to an NSX controller. NOTE: When no keyword is specified, the nsx option is applied. Defaults nuage Enter the keyword nuage to connect to a Nuage controller.
To unconfigure VAP, use the no vxlan-instance 1 command. Parameters Defaults instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID. The platform supports only the instance ID 1 in the initial release. Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON.
Internal Loopback: DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/2/3)#sho c ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/2/3 description connected IXIA card 1 port 14 vxlan-instance 1 Disable VXLAN Instance: DellEMC(conf)#no vxlan-instance 1 Related Commands feature vxlan — Enable VXLAN configuration globally on the platform. vxlan-instance static Enable VXLAN instance configuration to be static on the platform.
vxlan-vnid Associate VNID to VLAN. Syntax vxlan-vnid VNID To remove the association, use the no vxlan-vnid command. Parameters Defaults VNID Enter the logical network identifier. None Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the S4048, S4048T, S6000, S6010, S6100, and Z9100.
remote-vtep-ip 2.2.2.2 vni-profile ni1 Controller Mode: DellEMC#show running-config vxlan ! feature vxlan ! vxlan-instance 1 gateway-ip 3.3.3.3 fail-mode secure controller 1 192.168.122.6 port 6632 ssl no shutdown Related Commands vxlan-instance- Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. show vxlan vxlan-instance Displays information related to Network Virtualization Overlay (NVO) Gateway. Syntax Parameters show vxlan vxlan-instance instance ID instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID.
show vxlan vxlan-instance logical network Displays logical network information related to Network Virtualization Overlay (NVO) Gateway. Syntax show vxlan vxlan-instance instance ID logical-network [name name] Parameters instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID. The platform supports only the instance ID 1 in the initial release. name name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name and enter the name of VXLAN logical network up to a length of maximum 30 characters.
A.B.C.D Defaults Enter the IP address of the VTEP. Disabled Command Modes VXLAN INSTANCE Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced the static mode on the S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010– ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. Example Related Commands vxlan-instance- Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. show vxlan vxlan-instance statistics remote-vtep-ip Displays VXLAN statistics for a specific VXLAN tunnel. Syntax show vxlan vxlan-instance instance ID statistics remote-vtep-ip IP Address Parameters instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID.
vnid VNID (Optional) Enter the keyword vnid and enter the ID of the VXLAN. The range is from 1 to 16777215. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Updated to show VLT peer’s local macs. 9.11(0.0) Introduced the static mode on the S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010– ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. 9.
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Updated to show VLT peer’s local macs. 9.11(0.0) Introduced the static mode on the S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010– ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Remote Vtep IP VNI profile VNID count VNID list : : : : 10.10.10.
64 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IPv4 VRRP Commands IPv6 VRRP Commands IPv4 VRRP Commands The following are IPv4 VRRP commands. advertise-interval Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements. Syntax advertise-interval {seconds | centisecs centisecs } To return to the default settings, use the no advertise-interval command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds.
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Dell EMC Networking recommends keeping the default setting for this command. If you do change the time interval between VRRP advertisements on one router, change it on all routers. authentication-type Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges.
Usage Information The system encrypts the password and the show config command displays the encrypted text string. clear counters vrrp Clear the counters maintained on VRRP operations. Syntax clear counters vrrp [vrrp-id] [ipv6] Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the VRRP group ID to clear the group’s counters. The range is from 1 to 255. ipv6 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 to clear counters from the IPv6 VRRP group.
between 1 and 4, specify the port range as clear counters interfaces interfacetype 1/1/1 - 1/1/4. debug vrrp Enable VRRP debugging. Syntax debug vrrp [vrrp-id] {all | bfd | database | interface | ipv6 | packets | state | timer} To disable debugging, use the no debug vrrp [vrrp-id] {all | bfd | database | interface | ipv6 | packets | state | timer} command. Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID. all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups.
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If you do not specify an option, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups. description Configure a short text string describing the VRRP group. Syntax description text To delete a VRRP group description, use the no description command. Parameters Defaults text Enter a text string up to 80 characters long.
To re-enable a disabled VRRP group, use the no disable command. Command Modes VRRP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Added support for centisecs on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. priority Specify a VRRP priority value for the VRRP group. The VRRP protocol uses this value during the MASTER election process. Syntax priority priority To return to the default value, use the no priority command.
If you set the priority command to 255 and the virtual-address is not equal to the interface’s primary IP address, an error message appears. show config View the non-default VRRP configuration. Syntax show config [verbose] Parameters verbose (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword verbose to view all the VRRP group configuration information, including default information. Command Modes VRRP Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the virtual router identifier for the VRRP group to view only that group. The range is from 1 to 255. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a table of information about the VRRP groups. interface type (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
Item Description ● Y = Preempt is enabled. ● N = Preempt is not enabled. Example (Brief) Usage Information State Displays the operational state of the interface using one of the following: ● NA/IF (the interface is not available). ● MASTER (the interface associated with the MASTER router). ● BACKUP (the interface associated with the BACKUP router). Master addr Displays the IP address of the MASTER router.
Example Example (VRRP VRF) DellEMC> show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3, VRID: 1, Net: 10.1.1.253 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 105, Master: 10.1.1.253 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 1862, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
priority-cost Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the amount to subtract from the priority value. The range is from 1 to 254. The default is 10. priority cost = 10 Command Modes VRRP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced support for telnetting to the VRRP group IP address assigned using this command. 6.2.1.
Usage Information This command applies to a single interface. When you use this command with the vrrp delay reload command, the later timer rules VRRP enabling. For example, if vrrp delay reload is 600 and vrrp delay minimum is 300: ● When the system reloads, VRRP waits 600 seconds (10 minutes) to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP.
vrrp-group Assign a VRRP ID to an interface. You can configure up to 12 VRRP groups per interface. Syntax Parameters Defaults vrrp-group vrrp-id vrrp-id Enter a number as the group ID. The range is from 1 to 255. Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
Defaults 2 Command Modes VRRP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
clear counters vrrp ipv6 Clear the counters recorded for IPv6 VRRP groups. Syntax Parameters clear counters vrrp ipv6 [vrid | vrf vrf-name] vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of an IPv6 VRRP group; range is from 1 to 255. vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a VRF instance to clear the counters of all IPv6 VRRP groups in the specified VRF. The maximum is 32 characters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel, and then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan, and then the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094. vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID.
interface Enter the following keywords and the number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel, and then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan, and then a number from 1 to 4094.
Line starting with Description Adv rcvd:... Displays counters for the following: ● Adv rcvd displays the number of VRRP advertisements received on the interface. ● Adv sent displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent on the interface. ● Bad pkts rcvd displays the number of invalid packets received on the interface. Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group. Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the VRRP router to which the interface is connected.
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.4.2.1 The range of valid VRID values on the E-Series when VRF microcode is loaded in CAM changed from 1 to 15. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series, C-Series, and S-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
65 X.509v3 X.509v3 is a standard for public key infrastructure (PKI) to manage digital certificates and public key encryption. This standard specifies a format for public-key certificates or digital certificates. Dell EMC Networking OS supports X.509v3 standards.
crypto ca-cert install Downloads and installs the certificate of a Certificate Authority (CA) on to the device. Syntax Parameters Defaults crypto ca-cert install path path Enter the path where the CA certificate is available for download. The format that you use to specify the location of the CA certificate also includes the protocol that is used to contact the CA.
● secadmin The certificate matching the current FIPS state is deleted. If the system is in FIPS mode, the FIPS certificate is deleted. If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the non-FIPS certificate is deleted. Before deleting the system’s trusted certificate, the system prompts you to specify whether to proceed with deletion. If you proceed, the system deletes the certificate and also the private key.
email email- address Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword email followed a valid email address used for communication with the organization. validity days (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword validity followed by the number of days for which the certificate is valid. NOTE: For CSRs, validity has no effect. For self-signed certificates, if validity is not specified, it defaults to 3650 days, or 10 years. length length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword length followed by a bit length value.
Parameters cert-file Enter the keyword cert-file to specify that the certificate needs to be downloaded. cert-path Enter the path where the certificate is locally stored. The path can be a full path or a relative path. If the system accepts this path, a notification is sent indicating the location where the certificate file is stored. Following are example of a path that you can specify: flash://certs/s4810-001-request.crtand usbflash:/certs/s4810-001-cert.
If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the certificate will be installed as the non-FIPS certificate. When FIPS mode is enabled/disabled, the certificates (and keys) are switched by the system. Related Commands ● crypto ca-cert install crypto x509 ocsp Configures the OCSP behavior. Syntax Parameters Defaults crypto x509 ocsp [nonce] [sign-requests] nonce Enter the keyword nonce to use the nonce feature for the OCSP requests to OCSP responder communication.
Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command: Related Commands Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced this command.
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to enable TCP. udp Enter the keyword udp to enable UDP. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. sha1 fingerprint Enter the keyword sha1 followed by the finger print. This option is only available when the secure option is configured. This new option enables the Syslog feature to compare the received certificate’s sha-1 fingerprint against this configured sha-1 fingerprint.
Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced this command. The following RBAC roles are allowed to issue this command: ● sysadmin ● secadmin When you use this command, the device maps the current certificate context in the certificate store to a CA certificate through the subject key identifier field. The subject key identifier field contains the SHA-1 hash of the CA’s public key. This configuration provides a way to uniquely identify a CA and associate it with any CA-specific settings.
Related Commands ● crypto x509 ocsp ocsp-server prefer Configures OCSP responder preference. You can configure the preference or order that the CA or a device should follow while contacting multiple OCSP responders. Syntax ocsp-server prefer Defaults None. Command Modes CERTIFICATE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
show crypto cert Displays the certificate information that is specified. Syntax show crypto cert {path} Parameters Defaults path (OPTIONAL) Enter the path to a local file where a certificate chain is stored in PEM format. If a path is not specified, display the certificate that is currently installed on the system. None. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
